NBG-334W - Wireless Router ZYXEL - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL NBG-334W ZYXEL

IP Address http://192.168.1.1

User Name admin

Password 1234

About This User's Guide

Intended Audience

This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NBG334W using the web configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.

Related Documentation

• Quick Start Guide
  The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.
  • Web Configurator Online Help
  Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information.

It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the NBG334W.

• Supporting Disk
  Refer to the included CD for support documents.
• ZyXEL Web Site
  Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications.

User Guide Feedback

Help us help you. Send all User Guide-related comments, questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address, or use e-mail instead. Thank you!

The Technical Writing Team,

ZyXEL Communications Corp.,

6 Innovation Road II,

Science-Based Industrial Park,

Hsinchu, 300, Taiwan.

E-mail: [e-mail]

Document Conventions

Warnings and Notes

These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User's Guide.

Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.

Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.

Syntax Conventions

• The NBG334W may be referred to as the “NBG334W”, the “device”, the “product” or the “system” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example, [ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the [ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket (>) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value. For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.

Icons Used in Figures

Figures in this User's Guide may use the following generic icons. The NBG334W icon is not an exact representation of your device.

NBG334W	Computer	Notebook computer
Server	DSLAM	Firewall
Telephone	Switch	Router
Modem	NBG334W

Safety Warnings

For your safety, be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions.

• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
  • Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the power outlet.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
• If you wall mount your device, make sure that no electrical lines, gas or water pipes will be damaged.

This product is recyclable. Dispose of it properly.

Diagram showing a trash bin crossed out by a diagonal line, indicating no waste or discharge.

Contents Overview

Introduction 29

Getting to Know Your NBG334W 31

Introducing the Web Configurator 35

Connection Wizard 47

AP Mode 63

Network 71

Wireless LAN 73

Wireless Tutorial 93

WAN 101

LAN 111

Guest WLAN 117

DHCP 123

Network Address Translation (NAT) 129

Dynamic DNS 139

Security 141

Firewall 143

Content Filtering 149

Management 153

Static Route Screens 155

Bandwidth Management 159

Remote Management 169

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) 175

Maintenance and Troubleshooting 187

System 189

Logs 193

Tools 207

Configuration Mode 213

Sys Op Mode 215

Language 219

Troubleshooting 221

Appendices and Index 227

Table of Contents

About This User's Guide .... 3

Document Conventions....4

Safety Warnings....6

Contents Overview 9

Table of Contents......11

List of Figures 19

List of Tables 25

Part I: Introduction.... 29

Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NBG334W....31

1.1 Overview ...... 31
1.2 AP Mode 31
1.3 Router Mode 32
1.4 Router Features vs. AP Features 32
1.5 Ways to Manage the NBG334W 33
1.6 Good Habits for Managing the NBG334W 33
1.7 LEDs 33

Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ....35

2.1 Web Configurator Overview 35
2.2 Accessing the Web Configurator 35
2.3 Resetting the NBG334W 37
2.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button 37
2.4 Navigating the Web Configurator 37
2.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode 37
2.5.1 Navigation Panel 40
2.5.2 Summary: Any IP Table 43
2.5.3 Summary: Bandwidth Management Monitor 43
2.5.4 Summary: DHCP Table 43
2.5.5 Summary: Packet Statistics 44

2.5.6 Summary: Wireless Station Status 45

Chapter 3

Connection Wizard 47

3.1 Wizard Setup 47
3.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information .... 48

3.2.1 System Name 48
3.2.2 Domain Name 49

3.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN 49

3.3.1 Basic (WEP) Security 51
3.3.2 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security 52

3.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration 52

3.4.1 Ethernet Connection 53
3.4.2 PPPoE Connection 53
3.4.3 PPTP Connection 54
3.4.4 Your IP Address 56
3.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment 56
3.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask 57
3.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment 57
3.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment 58
3.4.9 WAN MAC Address 59

3.5 Connection Wizard: STEP 4: Bandwidth management 60
3.6 Connection Wizard Complete 60

Chapter 4

AP Mode....63

4.1 AP Mode Overview 63
4.2 Setting your NBG334W to AP Mode 63
4.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode 64

4.3.1 Navigation Panel 66

4.4 Configuring Your Settings 67

4.4.1 LAN Settings 67
4.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings 68

4.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode 68

Part II: Network....71

Chapter 5

Wireless LAN....73

5.1 Wireless Network Overview 73
5.2 Wireless Security Overview 75

5.2.1 SSID 75
5.2.2 MAC Address Filter 75
5.2.3 User Authentication 76
5.2.4 Encryption 76

5.3 Roaming 77

5.3.1 Requirements for Roaming 78

5.4 Quality of Service 78

5.4.1 WMM QoS 79

5.5 General Wireless LAN Screen 79

5.5.1 No Security 81
5.5.2 WEP Encryption 81
5.5.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK 83
5.5.4 WPA/WPA2 84

5.6 MAC Filter 86

5.7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen 86

5.8 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen 88

5.8.1 Application Priority Configuration 89

5.9 WiFi Protected Setup 90

5.9.1 WPS Screen 90

5.9.2 WPS Station Screen 91

Chapter 6 Wireless Tutorial ......93

6.1 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP 93
6.2 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG334W and Wireless Client ..... 93
6.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC) 94
6.2.2 PIN Configuration 95
6.3 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG334W 96
6.4 Configure Your Notebook 98

Chapter 7 WAN....101

7.1 WAN Overview 101
7.2 WAN MAC Address 101
7.3 Multicast 101
7.4 Internet Connection 102
7.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation 102
7.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation 103
7.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation 106
7.5 Advanced WAN Screen 109

Chapter 8 LAN....111

8.1 LAN Overview ...... 111

8.1.1 IP Pool Setup 111
8.1.2 System DNS Servers 111

8.2 LAN TCP/IP 111

8.2.1 Factory LAN Defaults 111
8.2.2 IP Address and Subnet Mask 112
8.2.3 Multicast 112
8.2.4 Any IP 112

8.3 LAN IP Screen 114
8.4 LAN IP Alias 114
8.5 Advanced LAN Screen 115

Chapter 9

Guest WLAN 117

9.1 General Guest WLAN Screen 118
9.2 Guest WLAN MAC Filter 118
9.3 Guest WLAN IP Screen 119
9.4 Guest WLAN Bandwidth Screen 120

Chapter 10

DHCP 123

10.1 DHCP 123
10.2 DHCP Server General Screen 123
10.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen 124
10.4 Client List Screen 126

Chapter 11

Network Address Translation (NAT)...... 129

11.1 NAT Overview 129
11.2 Using NAT 129

11.2.1 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers 129
11.2.2 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example 130

11.3 General NAT Screen 130

11.4 NAT Application Screen 131

11.4.1 Game List Example 133

11.5 Trigger Port Forwarding 134

11.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example 134
11.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports 135

11.6 NAT Advanced Screen 135

Chapter 12

Dynamic DNS 139

12.1 Dynamic DNS Introduction 139

12.1.1 DynDNS Wildcard 139
12.2 Dynamic DNS Screen 139

Part III: Security.... 141

Chapter 13

Firewall....143

13.1 Introduction to ZyXEL's Firewall 143
13.1.1 What is a Firewall? 143
13.1.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall 143
13.1.3 About the NBG334W Firewall 143
13.1.4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 144
13.2 Triangle Routes 144
13.2.1 Triangle Routes and IP Alias 144
13.3 General Firewall Screen 145
13.4 Services Screen 146

Chapter 14

Content Filtering 149

14.1 Introduction to Content Filtering 149
14.2 Restrict Web Features 149
14.3 Days and Times 149
14.4 Filter Screen 149
14.5 Schedule 151
14.6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking 152
14.6.1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking 152
14.6.2 Full Path URL Checking 152
14.6.3 File Name URL Checking 152

Part IV: Management.... 153

Chapter 15

Static Route Screens 155

15.1 Static Route Overview 155
15.2 IP Static Route Screen 155
15.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen 156

Chapter 16

Bandwidth Management....159

16.1 Bandwidth Management Overview 159

16.2 Application-based Bandwidth Management 159
16.3 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management 159
16.4 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management 160
16.5 Bandwidth Management Priorities ...... 160
16.6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services ...... 161
16.6.1 Services and Port Numbers 162
16.7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities .... 164
16.8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration 165
16.9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration 165
16.9.1 Rule Configuration 167
16.10 Bandwidth Management Monitor 168

Chapter 17

Remote Management....169

17.1 Remote Management Overview 169
17.1.1 Remote Management Limitations ...... 169
17.1.2 Remote Management and NAT 170
17.1.3 System Timeout 170
17.2 WWW Screen 170
17.3 Telnet 171
17.4 Telnet Screen 171
17.5 FTP Screen 172
17.6 DNS Screen 173

Chapter 18

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)....175

18.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play 175
18.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP? 175
18.1.2 NAT Traversal 175
18.1.3 Cautions with UPnP 175
18.2 UPnP and ZyXEL 176
18.3 UPnP Screen 176
18.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example 177

Part V: Maintenance and Troubleshooting 187

Chapter 19

System 189

19.1 System Overview ...... 189
19.2 System General Screen 189
19.3 Time Setting Screen 190

Chapter 20

Logs 193

20.1 View Log 193
20.2 Log Settings 194
20.3 Log Descriptions 197

Chapter 21

Tools....207

21.1 Firmware Upload Screen 207
21.2 Configuration Screen 208

21.2.1 Backup Configuration 209
21.2.2 Restore Configuration 209
21.2.3 Back to Factory Defaults 210

21.3 Restart Screen 210

Chapter 22

Configuration Mode 213

Chapter 23

Sys Op Mode 215

23.1 Overview 215

23.1.1 Router 215
23.1.2 AP 215

23.2 Selecting System Operation Mode 216

Chapter 24

Language 219

24.1 Language Screen 219

Chapter 25

Troubleshooting....221

25.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs 221
25.2 NBG334W Access and Login 222
25.3 Internet Access 224
25.4 Resetting the NBG334W to Its Factory Defaults 225
25.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting 225
25.6 Advanced Features 226

Part VI: Appendices and Index 227

Appendix A Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions 229

Appendix B Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 235

Appendix C IP Addresses and Subnetting 241

Appendix D Setting up Your Computer's IP Address 249

25.6.1 Verifying Settings 264

Appendix E Wireless LANs 265

25.6.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example 274

25.6.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example 274

Appendix F Services 277

Appendix G Legal Information....281

Appendix H Customer Support....285

Index 291

List of Figures

Figure 1 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode 31

Figure 2 Secure Wireless Internet Access in Router Mode 32

Figure 3 Front Panel 33

Figure 4 Change Password Screen 36

Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen 38

Figure 6 Any IP Table 43

Figure 7 Summary: BW MGMT Monitor 43

Figure 8 Summary: DHCP Table 44

Figure 9 Summary: Packet Statistics 44

Figure 10 Summary: Wireless Association List 45

Figure 11 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode 47

Figure 12 Select a Language ....48

Figure 13 Welcome to the Connection Wizard .... 48

Figure 14 Wizard Step 1: System Information .... 49

Figure 15 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN 50

Figure 16 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security .... 51

Figure 17 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security 52

Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters. 53

Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection .... 53

Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection .... 54

Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection .... 55

Figure 22 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address 56

Figure 23 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses .... 58

Figure 24 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address 59

Figure 25 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management 60

Figure 26 Connection Wizard Save 61

Figure 27 Connection Wizard Complete 61

Figure 28 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode 63

Figure 29 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 64

Figure 30 Status: AP Mode 64

Figure 31 Menu: AP Mode 66

Figure 32 Network > LAN > IP 68

Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network ...... 73

Figure 34 Roaming Example 78

Figure 35 Network > Wireless LAN > General 80

Figure 36 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security 81

Figure 37 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP 82

Figure 38 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK 83

Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2 84

Figure 40 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter 86

Figure 41 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced 87

Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS 88

Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration 89

Figure 44 WPS 91

Figure 45 WPS Station 92

Figure 46 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet 93

Figure 47 Example WPS Process: PBC Method 95

Figure 48 Example WPS Process: PIN Method 96

Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > General 97

Figure 50 Status: AP Mode 98

Figure 51 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t 99

Figure 52 Security Settings 99

Figure 53 Confirm Save 99

Figure 54 Link Status .... 100

Figure 55 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation .... 102

Figure 56 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation 104

Figure 57 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation 107

Figure 58 Network > WAN > Advanced 109

Figure 59 Any IP Example ......113

Figure 60 Network > LAN > IP ....114

Figure 61 Network > LAN > IP Alias ....115

Figure 62 Network > LAN > Advanced 115

Figure 63 Guest Wireless LAN Network ....117

Figure 64 Network > Guest WLAN > General 118

Figure 65 Network > Guest WLAN > MAC Filter 119

Figure 66 Network > Guest WLAN > IP 120

Figure 67 Example: Bandwidth for Different Networks .... 120

Figure 68 Network > Guest WLAN > Bandwidth 121

Figure 69 Network > DHCP Server > General 123

Figure 70 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced 125

Figure 71 Network > DHCP Server > Client List 127

Figure 72 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 130

Figure 73 Network > NAT > General 130

Figure 74 Network > NAT > Application 132

Figure 75 Game List Example 134

Figure 76 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 135

Figure 77 Network > NAT > Advanced 136

Figure 78 Dynamic DNS 140

Figure 79 Using IP Alias to Solve the Triangle Route Problem 145

Figure 80 Security > Firewall > General I 145

Figure 81 Security > Firewall > Services 146

Figure 82 Security > Content Filter > Filter 150

Figure 83 Security > Content Filter > Schedule 151

Figure 84 Example of Static Routing Topology .... 155

Figure 85 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route .... 156

Figure 86 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup 157

Figure 87 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example 160

Figure 88 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General 165

Figure 89 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced 166

Figure 90 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration 167

Figure 91 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor 168

Figure 92 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW 170

Figure 93 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network 171

Figure 94 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet 171

Figure 95 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP 172

Figure 96 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS 173

Figure 97 Management > UPnP > General 176

Figure 98 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 177

Figure 99 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components .... 178

Figure 100 Network Connections .... 178

Figure 101 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard .... 179

Figure 102 Networking Services .... 179

Figure 103 Network Connections .... 180

Figure 104 Internet Connection Properties ...... 181

Figure 105 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings 182

Figure 106 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 182

Figure 107 System Tray Icon .... 183

Figure 108 Internet Connection Status .... 183

Figure 109 Network Connections ...... 184

Figure 110 Network Connections: My Network Places .... 185

Figure 111 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example 185

Figure 112 Maintenance > System > General 189

Figure 113 Maintenance > System > Time Setting 190

Figure 114 Maintenance > Logs > View Log 193

Figure 115 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings 195

Figure 116 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware 207

Figure 117 Upload Warning 208

Figure 118 Network Temporarily Disconnected 208

Figure 119 Upload Error Message 208

Figure 120 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration 209

Figure 121 Configuration Restore Successful 210

Figure 122 Temporarily Disconnected ...... 210

Figure 123 Configuration Restore Error 210

Figure 124 Maintenance > Tools > Restart ....211

Figure 125 Maintenance > Config Mode > General 213

Figure 126 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode 215

Figure 127 IP Address in AP Mode .... 216

Figure 128 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 216

Figure 129 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router 216

Figure 130 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP 217

Figure 131 Language ...... 219

Figure 132 Wall-mounting Example ...... 233

Figure 133 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 233

Figure 134 Pop-up Blocker 235

Figure 135 Internet Options: Privacy 236

Figure 136 Internet Options: Privacy 237

Figure 137 Pop-up Blocker Settings 237

Figure 138 Internet Options: Security 238

Figure 139 Security Settings - Java Scripting 239

Figure 140 Security Settings - Java 239

Figure 141 Java (Sun) 240

Figure 142 Network Number and Host ID 242

Figure 143 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting 244

Figure 144 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting 245

Figure 145 Windows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration 250

Figure 146 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address 251

Figure 147 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 252

Figure 148 Windows XP: Start Menu 253

Figure 149 Windows XP: Control Panel 253

Figure 150 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 254

Figure 151 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 254

Figure 152 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 255

Figure 153 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 256

Figure 154 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 257

Figure 155 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 258

Figure 156 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 258

Figure 157 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 259

Figure 158 Macintosh OS X: Network 260

Figure 159 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 261

Figure 160 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General 262

Figure 161 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 262

Figure 162 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate 263

Figure 163 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 263

Figure 164 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 263

Figure 165 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf 264

Figure 166 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card 264

Figure 167 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties 264

Figure 168 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network 265
Figure 169 Basic Service Set .... 266
Figure 170 Infrastructure WLAN 267
Figure 171 RTS/CTS 268
Figure 172 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication ...... 274

List of Tables

Table 1 Features Available in Router Mode vs. AP Mode 32

Table 2 Front Panel LEDs 33

Table 3 Status Screen Icon Key 38

Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen 39

Table 5 Screens Summary 41

Table 6 Summary: DHCP Table 44

Table 7 Summary: Packet Statistics 45

Table 8 Summary: Wireless Association List 46

Table 9 Wizard Step 1: System Information .... 49

Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN 50

Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security 51

Table 12 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security 52

Table 13 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters .... 53

Table 14 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection 54

Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection .... 55

Table 16 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address .... 56

Table 17 Private IP Address Ranges 56

Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses .... 58

Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses ....59

Table 20 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address 59

Table 21 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management 60

Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen 65

Table 23 Screens Summary 66

Table 24 Network > LAN > IP 68

Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication 76

Table 26 WMM QoS Priorities 79

Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > General 80

Table 28 Wireless No Security 81

Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP 82

Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK 83

Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2 85

Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter 86

Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced 87

Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS 88

Table 35 WPS 91

Table 36 WPS Station 92

Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation 103

Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation 105

Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation 108

Table 40 WAN > Advanced ....110

Table 41 Network > LAN > IP ....114

Table 42 Network > LAN > IP Alias ....115

Table 43 Network > LAN > Advanced 116

Table 44 Network > Guest WLAN > General 118

Table 45 Network > Guest WLAN > MAC Filter ..... 119

Table 46 Network > Guest WLAN > IP 120

Table 47 Network > Guest WLAN > Bandwidth 121

Table 48 Network > DHCP Server > General 124

Table 49 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced 125

Table 50 Network > DHCP Server > Client List 127

Table 51 Network > NAT > General 131

Table 52 NAT Application 132

Table 53 Network > NAT > Advanced 136

Table 54 Dynamic DNS 140

Table 55 Security > Firewall > General 146

Table 56 Security > Firewall > Services 147

Table 57 Security > Content Filter > Filter 150

Table 58 Security > Content Filter > Schedule 151

Table 59 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route 156

Table 60 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup 157

Table 61 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example 160

Table 62 Bandwidth Management Priorities 160

Table 63 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services 161

Table 64 Commonly Used Services ...... 163

Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes 164

Table 66 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General 165

Table 67 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced 166

Table 68 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration . 167

Table 69 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW 170

Table 70 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet 172

Table 71 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP 172

Table 72 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS 173

Table 73 Management > UPnP > General 176

Table 74 Maintenance > System > General 189

Table 75 Maintenance > System > Time Setting 191

Table 76 Maintenance > Logs > View Log 194

Table 77 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings 195

Table 78 System Maintenance Logs 197

Table 79 System Error Logs 198

Table 80 Access Control Logs 198

Table 81 TCP Reset Logs 198

Table 82 Packet Filter Logs ...... 199

Table 83 ICMP Logs 199

Table 84 CDR Logs 200

Table 85 PPP Logs 200

Table 86 UPnP Logs 200

Table 87 Content Filtering Logs ...... 200

Table 88 Attack Logs 201

Table 89 PKI Logs 202

Table 90 802.1X Logs 203

Table 91 ACL Setting Notes 204

Table 92 ICMP Notes ...... 204

Table 93 Syslog Logs 205

Table 94 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types 205

Table 95 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware 207

Table 96 Maintenance Restore Configuration 209

Table 97 Maintenance > Config Mode > General 213

Table 98 Advanced Configuration Options 214

Table 99 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 217

Table 100 Hardware Features 229

Table 101 Firmware Features ...... 229

Table 102 Feature Specifications ...... 231

Table 103 Standards Supported 231

Table 104 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number 242

Table 105 Subnet Masks 243

Table 106 Maximum Host Numbers ...... 243

Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ...... 243

Table 108 Subnet 1 245

Table 109 Subnet 2 246

Table 110 Subnet 3 246

Table 111 Subnet 4 246

Table 112 Eight Subnets 246

Table 113 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning 247

Table 114 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning 247

Table 115 IEEE 802.11g 269

Table 116 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types 272

Table 117 Wireless Security Relational Matrix 275

Table 118 Examples of Services ...... 277

PART I

Introduction

Getting to Know Your NBG334W (31)

Introducing the Web Configurator (35)

Connection Wizard (47)

AP Mode (63)

Getting to Know Your NBG334W

This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the NBG334W.

1.1 Overview

The NBG334W acts as either an access point (AP) or a secure broadband router for all data passing between the Internet and your local network. In both AP and Router Mode you can set up a wireless network with other IEEE 802.11b/g compatible devices. In Router Mode a number of services such as a firewall and content filtering are also available. You can use media bandwidth management to efficiently manage traffic on your network. Bandwidth management features allow you to prioritize time-sensitive or highly important applications such as Voice over the Internet (VoIP).

1.2 AP Mode

Select AP Mode if you already have a router or gateway on your network which provides network services such as a firewall or bandwidth management.

The following figure shows computers in a WLAN connecting to the NBG334W, which acts as an access point (A). The NBG334W allows the wireless computers to share the same Internet access as the other computers connected to the router (B) on the same network.

Figure 1 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode

graph TD
    A["Router A"] --> B["Router B"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    subgraph WLAN
        D["Computer 1"]
        E["Computer 2"]
        F["Computer 3"]
        G["Computer 4"]
    end
    subgraph LAN
        H["Computer 5"]
        I["Computer 6"]
        J["Computer 7"]
    end
    A --> B
    B --> C
    style A fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fff,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fff,stroke:#333

1.3 Router Mode

Select Router Mode if you need to route traffic between your network and another network such as the Internet, and require important network services such as a firewall or bandwidth management.

The following figure shows computers in a WLAN connecting to the NBG334W (A), which has a DSL connection to the Internet. The NBG334W is set to Router Mode and has router features such as a built-in firewall (B).

Figure 2 Secure Wireless Internet Access in Router Mode

graph LR
    A["Router A"] -->|DSL| B["Brick Wall B"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    D["WLAN"] --> A
    E["Computer"] --> A
    F["Computer"] --> A

1.4 Router Features vs. AP Features

The following table shows which features are available in Router or AP Mode.

Table 1 Features Available in Router Mode vs. AP Mode

FEATURE	ROUTER MODE	AP MODE
DHCPThis allows individual clients to obtain IP addresses at start-up from a DHCP server.	YES	NO
FirewallThis establishes a network security barrier, protecting your network from attacks and controlling access between your network and the Internet.	YES	NO
Bandwidth ManagementThis allows you to allocate network bandwidth to specific applications and or subnets.	YES	NO
Any IPThis allows a computer to access the NBG334W when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334W are not in the same subnet.)	YES	NO
WirelessThis allows two or more devices to communicate without wires, based on IEEE 802.11 wireless standards.	YES	YES

1.5 Ways to Manage the NBG334W

Use any of the following methods to manage the NBG334W.

• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the NBG334W using a (supported) web browser.
• Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers.
• FTP. Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore.

1.6 Good Habits for Managing the NBG334W

Do the following things regularly to make the NBG334W more secure and to manage the NBG334W more effectively.

• Change the password. Use a password that's not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the NBG334W to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the NBG334W. You could simply restore your last configuration.

1.7 LEDs

Figure 3 Front Panel

ZyXEL

The following table describes the LEDs.

Table 2 Front Panel LEDs

LED	COLOR	STATUS	DESCRIPTION
POWER	Green	On	The NBG334W is receiving power and functioning properly.
		Off	The NBG334W is not receiving power.
LAN 1-4	Green	On	The NBG334W has a successful 10MB Ethernet connection.
		Blinking	The NBG334W is sending/receiving data.
	Amber	On	The NBG334W has a successful 100MB Ethernet connection.
		Blinking	The NBG334W is sending/receiving data.
		Off	The LAN is not connected.
WAN	Green	On	The NBG334W has a successful 10MB WAN connection.
		Blinking	The NBG334W is sending/receiving data.
	Amber	On	The NBG334W has a successful 100MB Ethernet connection.
		Blinking	The NBG334W is sending/receiving data.
		Off	The WAN connection is not ready, or has failed.
WLAN	Green	On	The NBG334W is ready, but is not sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN.
		Blinking	The NBG334W is sending/receiving data through the wireless LAN.
		Off	The wireless LAN is not ready or has failed.
WPS	WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) automatically sets up security on your wireless network. This function is currently unavailable.

Introducing the Web Configurator

This chapter describes how to access the NBG334W web configurator and provides an overview of its screens.

2.1 Web Configurator Overview

The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy setup and management of the NBG334W via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7.0 and later versions or Safari 2.0 or later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).

Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter to see how to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer.

2.2 Accessing the Web Configurator

1 Make sure your NBG334W hardware is properly connected and prepare your computer or computer network to connect to the NBG334W (refer to the Quick Start Guide).
2 Launch your web browser.
3 Type "http://192.168.1.1" as the website address.

Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access this website address.

• In Router Mode enable the DHCP Server. The NBG334W assigns your computer an IP address on the same subnet.
• In AP Mode the NBG334W does not assign an IP address to your computer, so you should check it's in the same subnet. See Section 4.5 on page 68 for more information.

4 Type "1234" (default) as the password and click Login. In some versions, the default password appears automatically - if this is the case, click Login.
5 You should see a screen asking you to change your password (highly recommended) as shown next. Type a new password (and retype it to confirm) and click Apply or click Ignore.

Figure 4 Change Password Screen

ZyXEL Please enter a new password Your router is currently using the default password. To protect your network from unauthorized users we suggest you change your password at this time. Please select a new password that will be easy to remember yet difficult for others to guess. We suggest you combine text with numbers to make it more difficult for an intruder to guess. The administrator password should must be between 1 - 30 characters. New Password: ****** Retype to Confirm: Apply Ignore

The management session automatically times out when the time period set in the Administrator Inactivity Timer field expires (default five minutes). Simply log back into the NBG334W if this happens.

6 Select the setup mode you want to use.

- Click Go to Wizard Setup to use the Configuration Wizard for basic Internet and Wireless setup.

• Click Go to Basic Setup if you want to view and configure basic settings that are not part of the wizard setup. Not all Web Configurator screens are available in this mode. See Chapter 22 on page 213 for more information.
  7 Click Go to Advanced Setup to view and configure all the NBG334W's settings.

ZyXEL Please select Wizard, Basic, or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings. We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your router. Use Basic mode if you need to make basic configuration changes. Use Advanced mode if you need access to more advanced features. Go to Wizard setup Go to Basic setup Go to Advanced setup Exit

2.3 Resetting the NBG334W

If you forget your password or IP address, or you cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the NBG334W to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously saved, the password will be reset to “1234” and the IP address will be reset to “192.168.1.1”.

2.3.1 Procedure to Use the Reset Button

1 Make sure the power LED is on.
2 Press the RESET button for five seconds or until the power LED begins to blink and then release it. When the power LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the NBG334W restarts.

2.4 Navigating the Web Configurator

The following summarizes how to navigate the web configurator from the Status screen in Router Mode and AP Mode.

2.5 The Status Screen in Router Mode

Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in Router Mode. (For information on the status screen in AP Mode see Chapter 4 on page 64.)

Figure 5 Web Configurator Status Screen

ZyXEL Status Refresh Interval: None Refresh Now Device Information System Name: NBG334W Firmware Version: V3.60(AMS.2)b2 | 09/21/2007 WAN Information - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:12 - IP Address: - - IP Subnet Mask: - - DHCP: - LAN Information: - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:11 - IP Address: 192.168.1.1 - IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 - DHCP: Server WLAN Information: - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:11 - Name(SSID): ZyXEL - Channel: 6 - Operating Channel: 6 - Security Mode: No Security - 802.11 Mode: 802.11b/g - WPS: Unconfigured Guest WLAN Information: - MAC Address: 06:19:cb:22:32:11 - IP Address: 192.168.2.1 - IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 - DHCP: Server - Name(SSID): Guest - Security Mode: No Security System Status System Up Time: 1:22:31 Current Date/Time: 2000-1-1/1:22:28 System Resource: -CPU Usage: 77.39% -Memory Usage: 58% System Setting: -Firewall: Enabled _Bandwidth Disabled _Management: Disabled -UPnP: Enabled _Configuration Advanced Mode: Advanced Interface Status Summary Any IP Table (Details...) BW MGMT Monitor (Details...) DHCP Table (Details...) Packet Statistics (Details...) WLAN Station Status (Details...) Interface Status Rate WAN Down N/A LAN Up 100M/Full WLAN Up 54M

The following table describes the icons shown in the Status screen.

Table 3 Status Screen Icon Key

ICON	DESCRIPTION
	Select a language from the drop-down list box to have the web configurator display in that language.
	Click this icon to open the setup wizard.
	Click this icon to view copyright and a link for related product information.
	Click this icon at any time to exit the web configurator.
	Select a number of seconds or None from the drop-down list box to refresh all screen statistics automatically at the end of every time interval or to not refresh the screen statistics.
	Click this button to refresh the status screen statistics.

The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen.

Table 4 Web Configurator Status Screen

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Device Information
System Name	This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System > General screen. It is for identification purposes.
Firmware Version	This is the firmware version and the date created.
WAN Information
- MAC Address	This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address	This shows the WAN port's IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask	This shows the WAN port's subnet mask.
- DHCP	This shows the WAN port's DHCP role - Client or None.
LAN Information
- MAC Address	This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address	This shows the LAN port's IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask	This shows the LAN port's subnet mask.
- DHCP	This shows the LAN port's DHCP role - Server or None.
WLAN Information
- MAC Address	This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- Name (SSID)	This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334W in the wireless LAN.
- Channel	This shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating Channel	This shows the channel number which the NBG334W is currently using over the wireless LAN.
- Security Mode	This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334W is using.
- 802.11 Mode	This shows the wireless standard.
- WPS	This shows the WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) Status. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen.
Guest WLAN Information
- MAC Address	This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of guest WLAN on your device.
- IP Address	This shows the IP address for guest WLAN network.
- IP Subnet Mask	This shows the subnet mask for guest WLAN network.
- DHCP	This shows the DHCP role (Server or None) for guest WLAN network.
- Name(SSID)	This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334W in the guest WLAN network.
- Security Mode	This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334W is using for guest WLAN network.
System Status
System Up Time	This is the total time the NBG334W has been on.
Current Date/Time	This field displays your NBG334W's present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage	This displays what percentage of the NBG334W's processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG334W is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management.
- Memory Usage	This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG334W is using. Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall.
System Setting
- Firewall	This shows whether the firewall is active or not.
- Bandwidth Management	This shows whether the bandwidth management is active or not.
- UPnP	This shows whether UPnP is active or not.
- Configuration Mode	This shows whether the advanced screens of each feature are turned on (Advanced) or not (Basic).
Interface Status
Interface	This displays the NBG334W port types. The port types are: WAN, LAN and WLAN.
Status	For the LAN and WAN ports, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled.
Rate	For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays N/A when the line is disconnected. For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
Any IP Table	Use this screen to view details of IP addresses assigned to devices not in the same subnet as the NBG334W.
BW MGMT Monitor	Use this screen to view the NBG334W's bandwidth usage and allotments.
DHCP Table	Use this screen to view current DHCP client information.
Packet Statistics	Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN Station Status	Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG334W.

2.5.1 Navigation Panel

Use the sub-menus on the navigation panel to configure NBG334W features.

The following table describes the sub-menus.

Table 5 Screens Summary

LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
Status		This screen shows the NBG334W's general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables.
Network
Wireless LAN	General	Use this screen to configure wireless LAN.
	MAC Filter	Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG334W to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG334W.
	Advanced	This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings.
	QoS	Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services.
	WPS	Use this screen to configure WPS.
	WPS Station	Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS.
WAN	Internet Connection	This screen allows you to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, DNS servers and the WAN MAC address.
	Advanced	Use this screen to configure other advanced properties.
LAN	IP	Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask.
	IP Alias	Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into subnets.
	Advanced	Use this screen to enable other advanced properties.
Guest WLAN	General	Use this screen to configure guest wireless LAN settings.
	MAC Filter	Use this screen to configure the NBG334W to block access to guest devices or block the guest devices from accessing the NBG334W.
	IP	Use this screen to configure guest wireless LAN IP address.
	Bandwidth	Use this screen to configure bandwidth settings for the guest wireless network.
DHCP Server	General	Use this screen to enable the NBG334W's DHCP server.
	Advanced	Use this screen to assign IP addresses to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses and to have DNS servers assigned by the DHCP server.
	Client List	Use this screen to view current DHCP client information and to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name).
NAT	General	Use this screen to enable NAT.
	Application	Use this screen to configure servers behind the NBG334W.
	Advanced	Use this screen to change your NBG334W's port triggering settings.
DDNS	General	Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS.
Security
Firewall	General	Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall.
	Services	This screen shows a summary of the firewall rules, and allows you to edit/add a firewall rule.

Table 5 Screens Summary

LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
Content Filter	Filter	Use this screen to block certain web features and sites containing certain keywords in the URL.
	Schedule	Use this screen to set the days and times for the NBG334W to perform content filtering.
Management
Static Route	IP Static Route	Use this screen to configure IP static routes.
Bandwidth MGMT	General	Use this screen to enable bandwidth management.
	Advanced	Use this screen to set the upstream bandwidth and edit a bandwidth management rule.
	Monitor	Use this screen to view the NBG334W's bandwidth usage and allotments.
Remote MGMT	WWW	Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the NBG334W.
	Telnet	Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the NBG334W.
	FTP	Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the NBG334W.
	DNS	Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the NBG334W.
UPnP	General	Use this screen to enable UPnP on the NBG334W.
Maintenance
System	General	Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names, password and inactivity timer.
	Time Setting	Use this screen to change your NBG334W's time and date.
Logs	View Log	Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected.
	Log Settings	Use this screen to change your NBG334W's log settings.
Tools	Firmware	Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334W.
	Configuration	Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG334W.
	Restart	This screen allows you to reboot the NBG334W without turning the power off.
Config Mode	General	This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or features.
Sys OP Mode	General	This screen allows you to select whether your device acts as a Router or a Access Point.
Language		This screen allows you to select the language you prefer.

2.5.2 Summary: Any IP Table

This screen displays the IP address of each computer that is using the NBG334W via the any IP feature. Any IP allows computers to access the Internet through the NBG334W without changing their network settings when NAT is enabled. To access this screen, open the Status screen (see Section 2.5 on page 37), and click (Details...) next to Any IP Table.

Figure 6 Any IP Table

Any IP TABLE # IP Address MAC Address Refresh

2.5.3 Summary: Bandwidth Management Monitor

Select the BW MGMT Monitor (Details...) hyperlink in Status screen. View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules. This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule. The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use.

Figure 7 Summary: BW MGMT Monitor

2.5.4 Summary: DHCP Table

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG334W's LAN and/or Guest WLAN as DHCP server(s) or disable them. When configured as a server, the NBG334W provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on that network, or else the computer must be manually configured.

Click the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here relates to your DHCP status. The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of all network clients using the NBG334W's DHCP server.

Figure 8 Summary: DHCP Table

LAN DHCP Table

IP Address Host Name MAC Address

1 192.168.1.33 TWPC12731 00:19:cb:04:80:1e 2 192.168.1.35twpc12116 00:02:e3:56:16:9d Guest WLAN DHCP Table

IP Address Host Name MAC Address

Refresh

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 6 Summary: DHCP Table

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This is the index number of the host computer.
IP Address	This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Host Name	This field displays the computer host name.
MAC Address	This field shows the MAC address of the computer with the name in the Host Name field.Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address which uniquely identifies a device. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Refresh	Click Refresh to renew the screen.

2.5.5 Summary: Packet Statistics

Click the Packet Statistics (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. Read-only information here includes port status, packet specific statistics and the "system up time". The Poll Interval(s) field is configurable and is used for refreshing the screen.

Figure 9 Summary: Packet Statistics

Packet Statistics Port Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Tx B/s Rx B/s Up Time WAN Down 68 296 0 0 0 00:00:00 LAN 100M/Full 12907 16373 0 774 583 1:01:02 WLAN 54M 4396 1022 0 0 0 5:52:58 Guest WLAN Down 0 0 0 0 0 00:00:00 System Up Time : 5:53:04 Poll Interval(s) : 5 sec Set Interval Stop

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 7 Summary: Packet Statistics

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Port	This is the NBG334W's port type.
Status	For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or Down when the line is disconnected.For the WAN port, it displays the port speed and duplex setting if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE or PPTP encapsulation. This field displays Down when the line is disconnected.For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and Down when the WLAN is disabled.
TxPkts	This is the number of transmitted packets on this port.
RxPkts	This is the number of received packets on this port.
Collisions	This is the number of collisions on this port.
Tx B/s	This displays the transmission speed in bytes per second on this port.
Rx B/s	This displays the reception speed in bytes per second on this port.
Up Time	This is the total amount of time the line has been up.
System Up Time	This is the total time the NBG334W has been on.
Poll Interval(s)	Enter the time interval for refreshing statistics in this field.
Set Interval	Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval(s) field.
Stop	Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics.

2.5.6 Summary: Wireless Station Status

Click the WLAN Station Status (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. View the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG334W in the WLAN Association List and Guest WLAN Association List sections. Association means that a wireless client (for example, your network or computer with a wireless network card) has connected successfully to the AP (or wireless router) using the same SSID, channel and security settings.

Figure 10 Summary: Wireless Association List

WLAN Association List

MAC Address Association Time

001 00:19:cb:04:80:1e 03:52:42 2000/01/01 Guest WLAN Association List

MAC Address Association Time

001 00:0e:35:96:6d:6a 01:38:47 2000/01/01 Refresh

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 8 Summary: Wireless Association List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This is the index number of an associated wireless station.
MAC Address	This field displays the MAC address of an associated wireless station.
Association Time	This field displays the time a wireless station first associated with the NBG334W's LAN or Guest WLAN network.
Refresh	Click Refresh to reload the list.

Connection Wizard

This chapter provides information on the wizard setup screens in the web configurator.

3.1 Wizard Setup

The web configurator's wizard setup helps you configure your device to access the Internet. Refer to your ISP (Internet Service Provider) checklist in the Quick Start Guide to know what to enter in each field. Leave a field blank if you don't have that information.

1 After you access the NBG334W web configurator, click the Go to Wizard setup hyperlink.

You can click the Go to Basic setup or Go to Advanced setup hyperlink to skip this wizard setup and configure basic or advanced features accordingly.

Figure 11 Select Wizard or Advanced Mode

ZyXEL Please select Wizard, Basic, or Advanced mode The Wizard setup walks you through the most common configuration settings. We suggest you use this mode if it is the first time you are setting up your router. Use Basic mode if you need to make basic configuration changes. Use Advanced mode if you need access to more advanced features. Go to Wizard setup Go to Basic setup Go to Advanced setup Exit

2 Choose your language from the drop-down list box.
3 Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen.

Figure 12 Select a Language

Welcome to the ZyXEL Wizard Setup Please choose the language you need Language : English Configuration Wizard Next > Exit

4 Read the on-screen information and click Next.

Figure 13 Welcome to the Connection Wizard

Welcome to the ZyXEL Connection Wizard The Connection Wizard will walk you through the most common configuration options. This wizard has been broken down into three steps, each of which may have multiple pages. This wizard will take you through the following steps: Step 1 : System Information Setup. Step 2 : Wireless LAN Setup. Step 3 : Internet Configuration Setup. Step 4 : Bandwidth Management Setup. Exit

3.2 Connection Wizard: STEP 1: System Information

System Information contains administrative and system-related information.

3.2.1 System Name

System Name is for identification purposes. However, because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer's "Computer Name".

• In Windows 95/98 click Start, Settings, Control Panel, Network. Click the Identification tab, note the entry for the Computer Name field and enter it as the System Name.
• In Windows 2000, click Start, Settings and Control Panel and then double-click System. Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button. Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the System Name.
• In Windows XP, click Start, My Computer, View system information and then click the Computer Name tab. Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the NBG334W System Name.

3.2.2 Domain Name

The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN. If you leave this blank, the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used. While you must enter the host name (System Name) on each individual computer, the domain name can be assigned from the NBG334W via DHCP.

Click Next to configure the NBG334W for Internet access.

Figure 14 Wizard Step 1: System Information

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 System Information System Name Enter a name to help you identify your router on the network. This information is optional and you may safely leave this field blank. System Name: Domain Name The ISP's domain name is often sent automatically by the ISP to the router. If you are having difficulty accessing ISP services, you may need to enter the Domain Name manually in the field below. This field is normally left blank. Domain Name: zyxel.com Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 9 Wizard Step 1: System Information

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
System Name	System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG334W in an Ethernet network. Enter a descriptive name. This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes "-" and underscores "_" are accepted.
Domain Name	Type the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP. The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name.
Back	Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.3 Connection Wizard: STEP 2: Wireless LAN

Set up your wireless LAN using the following screen.

Figure 15 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 WIRELESS LAN WIRELESS LAN The SSID is the name given to your wireless network. It may be possible to see multiple wireless networks from your home or office, so choose a name that you will be able to recognize later. Name(SSID) ZyXEL Security Extend(WPA2-PSK with customized key) Channel Selection Channel 06 Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 10 Wizard Step 2: Wireless LAN

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Name (SSID)	Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.If you change this field on the NBG334W, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network.
Security	Select a Security level from the drop-down list box.Choose Auto to have the NBG334W generate a pre-shared key automatically. A screen pops up displaying the generated pre-shared key after you click Next. Write down the key for use later when connecting other wireless devices to your network.Click OK to continue.Choose None to have no wireless LAN security configured. If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG334W, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 3.4 on page 52.Choose Basic (WEP) security if you want to configure WEP Encryption parameters. If you choose this option, go directly to Section 3.3.1 on page 51.Choose Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) security to configure a Pre-Shared Key.Choose this option only if your wireless clients support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK respectively. If you choose this option, skip directly to Section 3.3.2 on page 52.
Channel Selection	The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a channel.Select a channel that is not used by any nearby devices.
Back	Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

The wireless stations and NBG334W must use the same SSID, channel ID and WEP encryption key (if WEP is enabled), WPA-PSK (if WPA-PSK is enabled) or WPA2-PSK (if WPA2-PSK is enabled) for wireless communication.

3.3.1 Basic (WEP) Security

Choose Basic (WEP) to setup WEP Encryption parameters.

Figure 16 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 WIRELESS LAN Passphrase Use Passphrase to automatically generates a WEP key. Passphrase Generate WEP Key The higher the WEP Encryption, the higher the security but the slower the throughput. Select 64-bit WEP, 128-bit WEP or 256-bit WEP to enable data encryption and select one of the Key radio buttons to use as the WEP key. Entering a manual key in a Key field and selecting ASCII or Hex WEP key input method. WEP Encryption 64-bit WEP 64-bit WEP: Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for each Key(1-4). 128-bit WEP: Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A- F") for each Key(1-4). (Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission.) ASCII Hex Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Passphrase	Type a Passphrase (up to 32 printable characters) and click Generate. The NBG334W automatically generates a WEP key.
WEP Encryption	Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to allow data encryption.
ASCII	Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as the WEP keys.
HEX	Select this option to enter hexadecimal characters as the WEP keys.The preceding “0x” is entered automatically.
Key 1 to Key 4	The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG334W and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1.
Back	Click Back to display the previous screen.

Table 11 Wizard Step 2: Basic (WEP) Security

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Next	Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.3.2 Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security

Choose Extend (WPA-PSK) or Extend (WPA2-PSK) security in the Wireless LAN setup screen to set up a Pre-Shared Key.

Figure 17 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security

STEP 1 > STEP 2 > STEP 3 > STEP 4 WIRELESS LAN WPA2 Pre-Shared Key Setup "WPA2-PSK" uses a "Pre-Shared Key" to authenticate wireless users and make sure they are allowed to access your network. Think of this pre-shared key as a shared password that you must know to get on the network. The pre-shared key should be at least 8 characters in length and made up of both letters and numbers. This pre-shared key is recommended to be different from the password you use to access this router or use to log-in to your ISP. Pre-Shared Key qwerty1234 Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 12 Wizard Step 2: Extend (WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK) Security

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Pre-Shared Key	Type from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters. You can set up the most secure wireless connection by configuring WPA in the wireless LAN screens. You need to configure an authentication server to do this.
Back	Click Back to display the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to proceed to the next screen.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4 Connection Wizard: STEP 3: Internet Configuration

The NBG334W offers three Internet connection types. They are Ethernet, PPP over Ethernet or PPTP. The wizard attempts to detect which WAN connection type you are using. If the wizard does not detect a connection type, you must select one from the drop-down list box. Check with your ISP to make sure you use the correct type.

This wizard screen varies according to the connection type that you select.

Figure 18 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters.

STEP 1 > STEP 2 > STEP 3 > STEP 4 Internet Configuration ISP Parameters for Internet Access Enter your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) connection settings Connection Type Ethernet Ethernet PPP over Ethernet PPTP Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen,

Table 13 Wizard Step 3: ISP Parameters

CONNECTION TYPE	DESCRIPTION
Ethernet	Select the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.
PPPoE	Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection. If your ISP gave you a an IP address and/or subnet mask, then select PPTP.
PPTP	Select the PPTP option for a dial-up connection.

3.4.1 Ethernet Connection

Choose Ethernet when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.

Figure 19 Wizard Step 3: Ethernet Connection

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Internet Configuration ISP Parameters for Internet Access Enter your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) connection settings Connection Type Ethernet Exit

3.4.2 PPPoE Connection

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) functions as a dial-up connection. PPPoE is an IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) standard specifying how a host personal computer interacts with a broadband modem (for example DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) to achieve access to high-speed data networks.

For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for instance, RADIUS).

One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let end users access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for specific users.

Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the subscriber and the ISP/carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the subscriber's site.

By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG334W (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG334W does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have Internet access.

Refer to the appendix for more information on PPPoE.

Figure 20 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection

STEP 1 > STEP 2 > STEP 3 > STEP 4 Internet Configuration ISP Parameters for Internet Access Enter your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) connection settings Connection Type PPP over Ethernet Service Name (optional) User Name Password *******

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 14 Wizard Step 3: PPPoE Connection

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameter for Internet Access
Connection Type	Select the PPP over Ethernet option for a dial-up connection.
Service Name	Type the name of your service provider.
User Name	Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password	Type the password associated with the user name above.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to continue.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.3 PPTP Connection

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables transfers of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks.

PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet.

Refer to the appendix for more information on PPTP.

The NBG334W supports one PPTP server connection at any given time.

Figure 21 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Internet Configuration ISP Parameters for Internet Access Enter your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) connection settings Connection Type PPTP User Name Password ********* PPTP Configuration • Get automatically from ISP (Default) • Use fixed IP address My IP Address 0.0.0.0 My IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 Connection ID/Name Exit

The following table describes the fields in this screen

Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Connection Type	Select PPTP from the drop-down list box. To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection.
User Name	Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password	Type the password associated with the User Name above.
PPTP Configuration
Get automatically from ISP	Select this radio button if your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address.
Use fixed IP address	Select this radio button, provided by your ISP to give the NBG334W a fixed, unique IP address.
My IP Address	Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
My IP Subnet Mask	Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP (if given).
Server IP Address	Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID/Name	Enter the connection ID or connection name in this field. It must follow the "c:id" and "n:name" format. For example, C:12 or N:My ISP.This field is optional and depends on the requirements of your ISP.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.

Table 15 Wizard Step 3: PPTP Connection

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Next	Click Next to continue.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.4 Your IP Address

The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed IP address or give the NBG334W an automatically assigned IP address depending on your ISP.

Figure 22 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Internet Configuration Your IP Address • Get automatically from your ISP • Used fixed IP address provided by your ISP Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen

Table 16 Wizard Step 3: Your IP Address

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Get automatically from your ISP	Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection. If you choose this option, skip directly to section 3.4.9.
Use fixed IP address provided by your ISP	Select this option if you were given IP address and/or DNS server settings by the ISP. The fixed IP address should be in the same subnet as your broadband modem or router.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to continue.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.5 WAN IP Address Assignment

Every computer on the Internet must have a unique IP address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for instance, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks.

Table 17 Private IP Address Ranges

10.0.0.0	-	10.255.255.255
172.16.0.0	-	172.31.255.255
192.168.0.0	-	192.168.255.255

You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or have it assigned by a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.

Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.

3.4.6 IP Address and Subnet Mask

Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.

Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.

If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.

Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your NBG334W, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.

The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG334W will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

3.4.7 DNS Server Address Assignment

Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa, for instance, the IP address of www.zyxel.com is 204.217.0.2. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it.

The NBG334W can get the DNS server addresses in the following ways.

1 The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the Wizard and/or WAN > Internet Connection screen.

2 If the ISP did not give you DNS server information, leave the DNS Server fields set to 0.0.0.0 in the Wizard screen and/or set to From ISP in the WAN > Internet Connection screen for the ISP to dynamically assign the DNS server IP addresses.

3.4.8 WAN IP and DNS Server Address Assignment

The following wizard screen allows you to assign a fixed WAN IP address and DNS server addresses.

Figure 23 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Internet Configuration WAN IP Address Assignment My WAN IP Address 172.23.23.49 My WAN IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 DNS Server Address Assignment First DNS Server 172.23.5.1 Second DNS Server 172.23.5.2 Third DNS Server 0.0.0.0 Exit

The following table describes the labels in this screen

Table 18 Wizard Step 3: WAN IP and DNS Server Addresses

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
WAN IP Address Assignment
My WAN IP Address	Enter your WAN IP address in this field. The WAN IP address should be in the same subnet as your DSL/Cable modem or router.
My WAN IP Subnet Mask	Enter the IP subnet mask in this field.
Gateway IP Address	Enter the gateway IP address in this field.
System DNS Server Address Assignment (if applicable)DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The NBG334W uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify here) to resolve domain names for DDNS and the time server.
First DNS ServerSecond DNS ServerThird DNS Server	Enter the DNS server's IP address in the fields provided.If you do not configure a system DNS server, you must use IP addresses when configuring DDNS and the time server.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to continue.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.4.9 WAN MAC Address

Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.

Table 19 Example of Network Properties for LAN Servers with Fixed IP Addresses

Choose an IP address	192.168.1.2-192.168.1.32; 192.168.1.65-192.168.1.254.
Subnet mask	255.255.255.0
Gateway (or default route)	192.168.1.1(NBG334W LAN IP)

This screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG334W's MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the "rom" file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different "rom" file. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication.

Figure 24 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address

STEP 1 > STEP 2 > STEP 3 > STEP 4 Internet Configuration WAN MAC Address Users configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address.Alternatively, select Spoof this Computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC address you are cloning. ● Factory default ● Clone the computer's MAC Address IP Address 192.168.1.33 ● Set WAN MAC Address 00:a0:c5:f3:86:5c Exit

The following table describes the fields in this screen.

Table 20 Wizard Step 3: WAN MAC Address

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Factory Default	Select Factory Default to use the factory assigned default MAC address.
Clone the computer's MAC address	Select this option and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. It is advisable to clone the MAC address from a computer on your LAN even if your ISP does not presently require MAC address authentication.
Set WAN MAC Address	Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to continue.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.5 Connection Wizard: STEP 4: Bandwidth management

Bandwidth management allows you to control the amount of bandwidth going out through the NBG334W's WAN, LAN or WLAN port and prioritize the distribution of the bandwidth according to the traffic type. This helps keep one service from using all of the available bandwidth and shutting out other users.

Figure 25 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Bandwidth Management(BM) Setting Enable BM for all traffic automatically Exit

The following fields describe the label in this screen.

Table 21 Wizard Step 4: Bandwidth Management

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable BM for all traffic automatically	Select the check box to have the NBG334W apply bandwidth management to traffic going out through the NBG334W's WAN, LAN, HomePlug AV or WLAN port. Bandwidth is allocated according to the traffic type automatically. Real-time packets, such as VoIP traffic always get higher priority.
Back	Click Back to return to the previous screen.
Next	Click Next to continue.
Exit	Click Exit to close the wizard screen without saving.

3.6 Connection Wizard Complete

Click Apply to save your configuration.

Figure 26 Connection Wizard Save

STEP 1 STEP 2 STEP 3 STEP 4 Internet Configuration Please Click the "Apply" Button to Complete the Connection Wizard. Note: If you are currently using a Wireless PC card to access this router AND you made changes to the SSID, then you will need to make the same changes to your Wireless PC card AFTER you click the Finish Button. Once the changes have been made to the Wireless PC card, you will be able to connect back to the router and continue the configuration process. Follow the on-screen instructions and click Finish to complete the wizard setup. Figure 27 Connection Wizard Complete 

Congratulations! The Connection Wizard configuration is complete. Please press "Finish" button to complete Connection Wizard. Check our exciting range of ZyXEL products atwww.zyxel.com Having Internet Access problems? 1. Verify your settings in this wizard. 2. If your wizard entries are correct, but still cannot access the Internet, then check that your ISP account is active and that the settings you entered in the wizard are correct. 3. If you still have problems, please contact customer support.

Well done! You have successfully set up your NBG334W to operate on your network and access the Internet. This chapter discusses how to configure settings while your NBG334W is set to AP Mode. Many screens that are available in Router Mode are not available in AP Mode.  See Chapter 6 on page 93 for an example of setting up a wireless network in AP mode.

4.1 AP Mode Overview

Use your NBG334W as an AP if you already have a router or gateway on your network. In this mode your device bridges a wired network (LAN) and wireless LAN (WLAN) in the same subnet. See the figure below for an example. Figure 28 Wireless Internet Access in AP Mode 

graph TD
    A["LAN"] --> B["Router"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    D["WLAN"] --> B
    E["Computer"] --> B
    F["Computer"] --> B
    G["Computer"] --> B
    H["Computer"] --> B

4.2 Setting your NBG334W to AP Mode

1 Log into the web configurator if you haven't already. See the Quick start Guide for instructions on how to do this. 2 To set your NBG334W to AP Mode, go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General and select Access Point. Figure 29 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 

General System Operation Mode Router Access Point Note: Router: In this mode, the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL/Cable Modem. PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port. Access Point: In this mode, all Ethernet ports are bridged together. The device allows the wireless- equipped computer can communicate with a wired network. Apply Reset

3 A pop-up appears providing information on this mode. Click OK in the pop-up message window. (See Section 23.2 on page 216 for more information on the pop-up.) Click Apply. Your NBG334W is now in AP Mode.  You do not have to log in again or restart your device when you change modes.

4.3 The Status Screen in AP Mode

Click on Status. The screen below shows the status screen in AP Mode. Figure 30 Status: AP Mode 

ZyXEL Status Refresh Interval: None Refresh Now NBG334W Network Maintenance Device Information System Name: NBG334W Firmware Version: V3.60(AMS.2)b2 | 09/21/2007 LAN Information: - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:11 - IP Address: 192.168.1.1 - IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 - DHCP: None WLAN Information: - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:11 - Name(SSID): ZyXEL - Channel: 6 - Operating Channel: 6 - Security Mode: No Security - 802.11 Mode: 802.11b/g - WPS: Unconfigured System Status System Up Time: 3:22:54 Current Date/Time: 2000-1-1/3:22:51 System Resource: -CPU Usage: 6.04% -Memory Usage: 58% System Setting: -Configuration Mode: Advanced Interface Status Summary Packet Statistics (Details...) WLAN Station Status (Details...) Interface Status Rate LAN Up 100M/Full WLAN Up 54M Message Ready

The following table describes the labels shown in the Status screen. Table 22 Web Configurator Status Screen

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Device Information
System Name	This is the System Name you enter in the Maintenance > System > General screen. It is for identification purposes.
Firmware Version	This is the firmware version and the date created.
LAN Information
- MAC Address	This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC Address of your device.
- IP Address	This shows the LAN port's IP address.
- IP Subnet Mask	This shows the LAN port's subnet mask.
- DHCP	This shows the LAN port's DHCP role - Client or None.
WLAN Information
- MAC Address	This shows the wireless adapter MAC Address of your device.
- Name (SSID)	This shows a descriptive name used to identify the NBG334W in the wireless LAN.
- Channel	This shows the channel number which you select manually.
- Operating Channel	This shows the channel number which the NBG334W is currently using over the wireless LAN.
- Security Mode	This shows the level of wireless security the NBG334W is using.
- 802.11 Mode	This shows the IEEE 802.11 standard that the NBG334W supports. Wireless clients must support the same standard in order to be able to connect to the NBG334W
- WPS	This shows the WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) Status. Click the status to display Network > Wireless LAN > WPS screen.
System Status
System Uptime	This is the total time the NBG334W has been on.
Current Date/Time	This field displays your NBG334W's present date and time.
System Resource
- CPU Usage	This displays what percentage of the NBG334W's processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the NBG334W is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using bandwidth management.
- Memory Usage	This shows what percentage of the heap memory the NBG334W is using. Heap memory refers to the memory that is not used by ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) and is thus available for running processes like NAT and the firewall.
System Setting
- Configuration Mode	This shows whether the advanced screens of each feature are turned on (Advanced) or not (Basic).
- System Operation Mode	This shows whether the system is configured to connect to the Internet in Router Mode or Access Point Mode.
Interface Status
Interface	This displays the NBG334W port types. The port types are: LAN and WLAN.
Status	For the LAN port, this field displays Down (line is down) or Up (line is up or connected). For the WLAN, it displays Up when the WLAN is enabled or Down when the WLAN is disabled.
Rate	For the LAN ports, this displays the port speed and duplex setting or N/A when the line is disconnected.For the WLAN, it displays the maximum transmission rate when the WLAN is enabled and N/A when the WLAN is disabled.
Summary
Packet Statistics	Use this screen to view port status and packet specific statistics.
WLAN Station Status	Use this screen to view the wireless stations that are currently associated to the NBG334W.

4.3.1 Navigation Panel

Use the menu in the navigation panel to configure NBG334W features in AP Mode. The following screen and table show the features you can configure in AP Mode. Figure 31 Menu: AP Mode 

Status NBG334W ■ Network Wireless LAN LAN ■ Maintenance System Logs Tools Config Mode Sys OP Mode Language

The following table describes the sub-menus. Table 23 Screens Summary

LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
Status		This screen shows the NBG334W's general device, system and interface status information. Use this screen to access the wizard, and summary statistics tables.
Network

Table 23 Screens Summary

LINK	TAB	FUNCTION
Wireless LAN	General	Use this screen to configure wireless LAN.
	MAC Filter	Use the MAC filter screen to configure the NBG334W to block access to devices or block the devices from accessing the NBG334W.
	Advanced	This screen allows you to configure advanced wireless settings.
	QoS	Use this screen to configure Wi-Fi Multimedia Quality of Service (WMM QoS). WMM QoS allows you to prioritize wireless traffic according to the delivery requirements of individual services.
	WPS	Use this screen to configure WPS.
	WPS Station	Use this screen to add a wireless station using WPS.
LAN	IP	Use this screen to configure LAN IP address and subnet mask or to get the LAN IP address from a DHCP server.
Maintenance
System	General	Use this screen to view and change administrative settings such as system and domain names, password and inactivity timer.
	Time Setting	Use this screen to change your NBG334W's time and date.
Logs	View Log	Use this screen to view the logs for the categories that you selected.
	Log Settings	Use this screen to change your NBG334W's log settings.
Tools	Firmware	Use this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334W.
	Configuration	Use this screen to backup and restore the configuration or reset the factory defaults to your NBG334W.
	Restart	This screen allows you to reboot the NBG334W without turning the power off.
Config Mode	General	This screen allows you to display or hide the advanced screens or features.
Language		This screen allows you to select the language you prefer.

4.4 Configuring Your Settings

4.4.1 LAN Settings

Use this section to configure your LAN settings while in AP Mode. Click Network > LAN to see the screen below.  If you change the IP address of the NBG334W in the screen below, you will need to log into the NBG334W again using the new IP address. Figure 32 Network > LAN > IP 

LAN TCP/IP Get form DHCP Server User Defined LAN IP IP Address 192.168.1.1 IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The table below describes the labels in the screen. Table 24 Network > LAN > IP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Get form DHCP Server	Select this option to allow the NBG334W to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server on the network. You must connect the WAN port to a device with a DHCP server enabled (such as a router or gateway). Without a DHCP server the NBG334W will have no IP address. You need to find out the IP address the DHCP server assigns to the NBG334W and use that address to log in to the NBG334W again.
User Defined LAN IP	Select this option to set the NBG334W's IP address. This setting is selected by default. Check the IP address is on the same domain as other devices on your network.
IP Address	Type the IP address in dotted decimal notation. The default setting is 192.168.1.1. If you change the IP address you will have to log in again with the new IP address.
IP Subnet Mask	The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W.
Gateway IP Address	Type the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG334W that will forward the packet to the destination. In AP Mode, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334W.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

4.4.2 WLAN and Maintenance Settings

The configuration of wireless and maintenance settings in AP Mode is the same as for Router Mode. • See Chapter 5 on page 69 for information on the configuring your wireless network. - See Maintenance and Troubleshooting (187) for information on the configuring your Maintenance settings.

4.5 Logging in to the Web Configurator in AP Mode

1 Connect your computer to the LAN port of the NBG334W. 2 The default IP address if the NBG334W is “192.168.1.1”. In this case, your computer must have an IP address in the range between “192.168.1.2” and “192.168.1.255”. 3 Click Start > Run on your computer in Windows. 4 Type "cmd" in the dialog box. 5 Type “ipconfig” to show your computer’s IP address. If your computer’s IP address is not in the correct range then see Appendix D on page 249 for information on changing your computer’s IP address. 6 After you've set your computer's IP address, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type "192.168.1.1" as the web address in your web browser. See Chapter 6 on page 93 for a tutorial on setting up a network with an AP.

PART II

Network

Wireless LAN (73) Wireless Tutorial (93) WAN (101) LAN (111) Guest WLAN (117) DHCP (123) Network Address Translation (NAT) (129) Dynamic DNS (139)

Wireless LAN

This chapter discusses how to configure the wireless network settings in your NBG334W. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks.

5.1 Wireless Network Overview

The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 33 Example of a Wireless Network 

graph TD
    A["Computer A"] -->|Wireless Signal| AP["AP"]
    B["Computer B"] -->|Wireless Signal| AP
    AP -->|Wireless Signal| A
    style AP fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style A fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B are called wireless clients. The wireless clients use the access point (AP) to interact with other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your NBG334W is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. - Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentity. - If two wireless networks overlap, they should use different channels. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. \- Every wireless client in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.

Requirements

To add a wireless LAN to your existing network, make sure you have the following: 1 an access point (AP) or a router with the wireless feature 2 at least one wireless network card/adapter which varies according to your computer. - If you have a desktop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter. - If you have a laptop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card. - If you have a desktop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter. - If you have a laptop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card. 3 a RADIUS server only if you want to use IEEE802.1x, WPA or WPA2 To have two or more computers communicate with each other wirelessly without an AP or wireless router, make sure you have the following: 1 two or more wireless network cards/adapters which vary according to your computers. \- If you have a desktop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless PCI adapter. \- If you have a laptop, use either a wireless USB adapter or a wireless CardBus card.

Setup Information

To set up your wireless network using an AP or wireless router, make sure your AP or wireless router and wireless network card(s)/adapter(s) use the same following settings: - SSID: - Channel: auto or \_\_\_\_ • Network type of a wireless network card/adapter: Infrastructure - wireless standard: IEEE 802.11b, g, b/g or a - Security: ( ) None ( ) WEP (64bit, 128bit or 256bit key) (ASCII or Hex): \_\_\_\_ ( ) IEEE 802.1x ( ) WPA-PSK (TKIP or AES): ( ) WPA (TKIP or AES) ( ) WPA2-PSK (TKIP or AES): \_\_\_\_ ( ) WPA2 (TKIP or AES) \- Preamble type (if available): auto, short or long To set up your wireless network without an AP or wireless router, make sure wireless network cards/adapters use the same following settings: • Network type: Ad-Hoc - SSID: - Channel: - wireless standard: IEEE 802.11b, g, b/g or a - Security: ( ) None ( ) WEP (64bit, 128bit or 256bit key) (ASCII or Hex): \_\_\_\_

5.2 Wireless Security Overview

The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network.

5.2.1 SSID

Normally, the AP acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AP does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.

5.2.2 MAC Address Filter

Every wireless client has a unique identification number, called a MAC address. ^1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters ^2 ; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each wireless client, see the appropriate User's Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AP which wireless clients are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a wireless client is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct settings (SSID, channel, and security). If a wireless client is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct settings. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized devices to get the MAC address of an authorized wireless client. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.

5.2.3 User Authentication

You can make every user log in to the wireless network before they can use it. This is called user authentication. However, every wireless client in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, there are two typical places to store the user names and passwords for each user. - In the AP: this feature is called a local user database or a local database. - In a RADIUS server: this is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If your AP does not provide a local user database and if you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. Local user databases also have an additional limitation that is explained in the next section.

5.2.4 Encryption

Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of user authentication. (See Section 5.2.3 on page 76 for information about this.) Table 25 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication

	NO AUTHENTICATION	RADIUS SERVER
Weakest↑Strongest	No Security	WPA
	Static WEP
	WPA-PSK
	WPA2-PSK	WPA2

For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every wireless client in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose the AP does not have a local user database, and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no user authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two wireless clients. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network.  It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. IEEE 802.1x and WEP encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. It is not possible to use WPA-PSK, WPA or stronger encryption with a local user database. In this case, it is better to set up stronger encryption with no authentication than to set up weaker encryption with the local user database. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your NBG334W, you can also select an option (WPA Compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some wireless clients support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA Compatible option in the NBG334W. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every wireless client in the wireless network must have the same key.

5.3 Roaming

A wireless station is a device with an IEEE 802.11a/b/g compliant wireless interface. An access point (AP) acts as a bridge between the wireless and wired networks. An AP creates its own wireless coverage area. A wireless station can associate with a particular access point only if it is within the access point's coverage area. In a network environment with multiple access points, wireless stations are able to switch from one access point to another as they move between the coverage areas. This is known as roaming. As the wireless station moves from place to place, it is responsible for choosing the most appropriate access point depending on the signal strength, network utilization or other factors. The roaming feature on the access points allows the access points to relay information about the wireless stations to each other. When a wireless station moves from a coverage area to another, it scans and uses the channel of a new access point, which then informs the other access points on the LAN about the change. An example is shown in Figure 34 on page 78. With roaming, a wireless LAN mobile user enjoys a continuous connection to the wired network through an access point while moving around the wireless LAN. Enable roaming to exchange the latest bridge information of all wireless stations between APs when a wireless station moves between coverage areas. Wireless stations can still associate with other APs even if you disable roaming. Enabling roaming ensures correct traffic forwarding (bridge tables are updated) and maximum AP efficiency. The AP deletes records of wireless stations that associate with other APs (Non-ZyXEL APs may not be able to perform this). 802.1x authentication information is not exchanged (at the time of writing). Figure 34 Roaming Example 

graph TD
    subgraph Ethernet
        A["Server"] --> B["AP 1"]
        C["Server"] --> D["AP 2"]
        E["X"] --> F["Y"]
        G["Computer"] --> H["Y"]
    end
    subgraph Ethernet
        I["Server"] --> J["Y"]
        K["Server"] --> L["Y"]
        M["Computer"] --> N["Y"]
    end
    B <--> D
    D <--> L
    style Ethernet fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    note right of Ethernet
        direction LR
        note right of Ethernet
        note right of Ethernet
        note left of Ethernet
        note right of Ethernet
        note left of Ethernet
        note right of Ethernet

The steps below describe the roaming process. 1 Wireless station Y moves from the coverage area of access point AP 1 to that of access point AP 2. 2 Wireless station Y scans and detects the signal of access point AP 2. 3 Wireless station Y sends an association request to access point AP 2. 4 Access point AP 2 acknowledges the presence of wireless station Y and relays this information to access point AP 1 through the wired LAN. 5 Access point AP 1 updates the new position of wireless station Y.

5.3.1 Requirements for Roaming

The following requirements must be met in order for wireless stations to roam between the coverage areas. 1 All the access points must be on the same subnet and configured with the same ESSID. 2 If IEEE 802.1x user authentication is enabled and to be done locally on the access point, the new access point must have the user profile for the wireless station. 3 The adjacent access points should use different radio channels when their coverage areas overlap. 4 All access points must use the same port number to relay roaming information. 5 The access points must be connected to the Ethernet and be able to get IP addresses from a DHCP server if using dynamic IP address assignment.

5.4 Quality of Service

This section discusses the Quality of Service (QoS) features available on the NBG334W.

5.4.1 WMM QoS

WMM (Wi-Fi MultiMedia) QoS (Quality of Service) ensures quality of service in wireless networks. It controls WLAN transmission priority on packets to be transmitted over the wireless network. WMM QoS prioritizes wireless traffic according to delivery requirements. WMM QoS is a part of the IEEE 802.11e QoS enhancement to certified Wi-Fi wireless networks. On APs without WMM QoS, all traffic streams are given the same access priority to the wireless network. If the introduction of another traffic stream creates a data transmission demand that exceeds the current network capacity, then the new traffic stream reduces the throughput of the other traffic streams. The NBG334W uses WMM QoS to prioritize traffic streams according to the IEEE 802.1q tag or DSCP information in each packet's header. The NBG334W automatically determines the priority to use for an individual traffic stream. This prevents reductions in data transmission for applications that are sensitive to latency (delay) and jitter (variations in delay).

5.4.1.1 WMM QoS Priorities

The following table describes the WMM QoS priority levels that the NBG334W uses. Table 26 WMM QoS Priorities

PRIORITY LEVEL	DESCRIPTION
voice(WMM_VOICE)	Typically used for traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter. Use this priority to reduce latency for improved voice quality.
video(WMM_VIDEO)	Typically used for traffic which has some tolerance for jitter but needs to be prioritized over other data traffic.
best effort(WMM_BEST_EFFORT)	Typically used for traffic from applications or devices that lack QoS capabilities. Use best effort priority for traffic that is less sensitive to latency, but is affected by long delays, such as Internet surfing.
background(WMM_BACKGROUND)	This is typically used for non-critical traffic such as bulk transfers and print jobs that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Use background priority for applications that do not have strict latency and throughput requirements.

5.5 General Wireless LAN Screen

 If you are configuring the NBG334W from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the NBG334W's SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the NBG334W's new settings. Click Network > Wireless LAN to open the General screen. Figure 35 Network > Wireless LAN > General 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel-06 2437MHz Operating Channel Channel-006 Security Security Mode No Security Apply Reset

The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 27 Network > Wireless LAN > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Wireless LAN	Click the check box to activate wireless LAN.
Name(SSID)	(Service Set IDentity) The SSID identifies the Service Set with which a wireless station is associated. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN.
Hide SSID	Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Channel Selection	Set the operating frequency/channel depending on your particular region.Select a channel from the drop-down list box. The options vary depending on whether you are using A or B/G frequency band and the country you are in.Refer to the Connection Wizard chapter for more information on channels.
Operating Channel	This displays the channel the NBG334W is currently using.
Security Mode	Select Static-WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA, WPA2-PSK, or WPA2 to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as this device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. See 5.5.2, 5.5.3, 5.5.4 sections. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without authentication.Note: If you enable the WPS function, only No Security, WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK are available in this option.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

See the rest of this chapter for information on the other labels in this screen.

5.5.1 No Security

Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption.  If you do not enable any wireless security on your NBG334W, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 36 Network > Wireless LAN > General: No Security 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel-06 2437MHz Operating Channel Channel-006 Security Security Mode No Security Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Wireless No Security

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Security Mode	Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

5.5.2 WEP Encryption

WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private. It encrypts unicast and multicast communications in a network. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. Your NBG334W allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption; click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select Static WEP from the Security Mode list. Figure 37 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel-10 2457MHz Operating Channel Channel-006 Security Security Mode Static WEP Passphrase Generate WEP Encryption 64-bit WEP Authentication Method Auto Note: 64-bit WEP: Enter 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for each Key (1-4). 128-bit WEP: Enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F") for each Key (1-4). (Select one WEP key as an active key to encrypt wireless data transmission.) ASCII Hex Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Apply Reset

The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 29 Network > Wireless LAN > General: Static WEP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Passphrase	Enter a passphrase (password phrase) of up to 32 printable characters and click Generate. The NBG334W automatically generates four different WEP keys and displays them in the Key fields below.
WEP Encryption	Select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP to enable data encryption.
Authentication Method	This field is activated when you select 64-bit WEP or 128-bit WEP in the WEP Encryption field.Select Auto, Open System or Shared Key from the drop-down list box.
ASCII	Select this option in order to enter ASCII characters as WEP key.
Hex	Select this option in order to enter hexadecimal characters as a WEP key.The preceding "0x", that identifies a hexadecimal key, is entered automatically.
Key 1 to Key 4	The WEP keys are used to encrypt data. Both the NBG334W and the wireless stations must use the same WEP key for data transmission.If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").You must configure at least one key, only one key can be activated at any one time. The default key is key 1.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

5.5.3 WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 38 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel-01 2412MHz Operating Channel Channel-006 Security Security Mode WPA2-PSK WPA Compatible Pre-Shared Key ReAuthentication Timer 1800 (In Seconds) Idle Timeout 3600 (In Seconds) Group Key Update Timer 1800 (In Seconds) Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
WPA Compatible	This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field.Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG334W even when the NBG334W is using WPA2-PSK or WPA2.
Pre-Shared Key	The encryption mechanisms used for WPA/WPA2 and WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols).
ReAuthentication Timer (in seconds)	Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds. The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.
Idle Timeout	The NBG334W automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed. The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour).

Table 30 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Group Key Update Timer	The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

5.5.4 WPA/WPA2

Click Network > Wireless LAN to display the General screen. Select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 39 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) ZyXEL Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel-01 2412MHz Operating Channel Channel-006 Security Security Mode WPA2 WPA Compatible ReAuthentication Timer 1800 (In Seconds) Idle Timeout 3600 (In Seconds) Group Key Update Timer 1800 (In Seconds) Authentication Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 Port Number 1812 Shared Secret Accounting Server Active IP Address 0.0.0.0 Port Number 1813 Shared Secret Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 31 Network > Wireless LAN > General: WPA/WPA2

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
WPA Compatible	This check box is available only when you select WPA2-PSK or WPA2 in the Security Mode field.Select the check box to have both WPA2 and WPA wireless clients be able to communicate with the NBG334W even when the NBG334W is using WPA2-PSK or WPA2.
ReAuthentication Timer (in seconds)	Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected. Enter a time interval between 10 and 9999 seconds.The default time interval is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).Note: If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.
Idle Timeout	The NBG334W automatically disconnects a wireless station from the wired network after a period of inactivity. The wireless station needs to enter the username and password again before access to the wired network is allowed.The default time interval is 3600 seconds (or 1 hour).
Group Key Update Timer	The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the AP (if using WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK key management) or RADIUS server (if using WPA/WPA2 key management) sends a new group key out to all clients. The re-keying process is the WPA/WPA2 equivalent of automatically changing the WEP key for an AP and all stations in a WLAN on a periodic basis. Setting of the Group Key Update Timer is also supported in WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK mode. The NBG334W default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Authentication Server
IP Address	Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number	Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812.You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret	Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the NBG334W.The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your NBG334W. The key is not sent over the network.
Accounting Server
Active	Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable user accounting through an external authentication server.
IP Address	Enter the IP address of the external accounting server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number	Enter the port number of the external accounting server. The default port number is 1813.You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret	Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external accounting server and the NBG334W.The key must be the same on the external accounting server and your NBG334W. The key is not sent over the network.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

5.6 MAC Filter

The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG334W to give exclusive access to up to 32 devices (Allow) or exclude up to 32 devices from accessing the NBG334W (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. To change your NBG334W's MAC filter settings, click Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 40 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station MAC Address Filter Active Filter Action Allow Deny Set MAC Address Set MAC Address 1 00:00:00:00:00 17 00:00:00:00:00 2 00:00:00:00:00 18 00:00:00:00:00 3 00:00:00:00:00 19 00:00:00:00:00 4 00:00:00:00:00 20 00:00:00:00:00 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 32 Network > Wireless LAN > MAC Filter

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Active	Select Yes from the drop down list box to enable MAC address filtering.
Filter Action	Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.Select Deny to block access to the NBG334W, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG334WSelect Allow to permit access to the NBG334W, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG334W.
Set	This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC Address	Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG334W in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

5.7 Wireless LAN Advanced Screen

Click Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 41 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Roaming Configuration Enable Roaming Port 3517 Wireless Advanced Setup RTS/CTS Threshold 2346 (256 ~ 2346) Fragmentation Threshold 2346 (256 ~ 2346) Enable Intra-BSS Traffic Output Power 100% 802.11 Mode 802.11b/g Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Roaming Configuration
Enable Roaming	Select this option if your network environment has multiple APs and you want your wireless device to be able to access the network as you move between wireless networks.
Wireless Advanced Setup
RTS/CTS Threshold	Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake.If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value, then the RTS/CTS handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.Enter a value between 0 and 2432.
Fragmentation Threshold	It is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2432.
Enable Intra-BSS Traffic	A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Output Power	Set the output power of the NBG334W in this field. If there is a high density of APs within an area, decrease the output power of the NBG334W to reduce interference with other APs.
802.11 Mode	Select 802.11b to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG334W.Select 802.11g to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG334W.Select 802.11b/g to allow either IEEE802.11b or IEEE802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the NBG334W. The transmission rate of your NBG334W might be reduced.

Table 33 Network > Wireless LAN > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

5.8 Quality of Service (QoS) Screen

The QoS screen allows you to automatically give a service (such as e-mail, VoIP or FTP) a priority level. Click Network > Wireless LAN > QoS. The following screen appears. Figure 42 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station QoS Setup Enable WMM QoS WMM QoS Policy Application Priority

Name Service Dest Port Priority Modify

1 - - 0 - 2 - - 0 - 3 - - 0 - Apply

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable WMM QoS	Select this to turn on WMM QoS (Wireless MultiMedia Quality of Service). The NBG334W assigns priority to packets based on the 802.1q or DSCP information in their headers. If a packet has no WMM information in its header, it is assigned the default priority.
WMM QoS Policy	Select Default to have the NBG334W automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.Select Application Priority from the drop-down list box to display a table of application names, services, ports and priorities to which you want to apply WMM QoS.
	The table appears only if you select Application Priority in WMM QoS Policy.
#	This is the number of an individual application entry.
Name	This field displays a description given to an application entry.
Service	This field displays either FTP, WWW, E-mail or a User Defined service to which you want to apply WMM QoS.
Dest Port	This field displays the destination port number to which the application sends traffic.
Priority	This field displays the priority of the application.Highest - Typically used for voice or video that should be high-quality.High - Typically used for voice or video that can be medium-quality.Mid - Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority. For example, Internet surfing.Low - Typically used for non-critical “background” applications, such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications.
Modify	Click the Edit icon to open the Application Priority Configuration screen. Modify an existing application entry or create a application entry in the Application Priority Configuration screen.Click the Remove icon to delete an application entry.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334W.

5.8.1 Application Priority Configuration

Use this screen to edit a WMM QoS application entry. Click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Figure 43 Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration 

Application Priority Configuration Name Service User defined Dest Port 0 (1~65535) Priority Highest Apply Cancel

See Appendix F on page 277 for a list of commonly-used services and destination ports. The following table describes the fields in this screen. Network > Wireless LAN > QoS: Application Priority Configuration

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Application Priority Configuration
Name	Type a description of the application priority.
Service	The following is a description of the applications you can prioritize with WMM QoS. Select a service from the drop-down list box.E-MailElectronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:POP3 - port 110IMAP - port 143SMTP - port 25HTTP - port 80FTPFile Transfer Protocol enables fast transfer of files, including large files that it may not be possible to send via e-mail. FTP uses port number 21.WWWThe World Wide Web is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser.User-DefinedUser-defined services are user specific services configured using known ports and applications.
Dest Port	This displays the port the selected service uses. Type a port number in the field provided if you want to use a different port to the default port.
Priority	Select a priority from the drop-down list box.
Apply	ClickApplyto save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Cancel	ClickCancelto return to the previous screen.

5.9 WiFi Protected Setup

WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Depending on the devices in your network, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the devices. Then, they connect and set up a secure network by themselves. See how to set up a secure wireless network using WPS in the Section 6.2 on page 93.

5.9.1 WPS Screen

Use this screen to enable/disable WPS, view or generate a new PIN number and check current WPS status. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS tab. Figure 44 WPS 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station WPS Setup Enable WPS PIN Number : 21346781 Generate WPS Status Status: Unconfigured Apply Refresh

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 WPS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
WPS Setup
Enable	Select this to enable the WPS feature.
PIN Number	This displays a PIN number last time system generated. Click Generate to generate a new PIN number.
WPS Satus
Status	This displays the WPS status.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Refresh	Click Refresh to get this screen information afresh.

5.9.2 WPS Station Screen

Use this screen when you want to add a wireless station using WPS. To open this screen, click Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station tab.  Note: After you click Push Button on this screen, you have to press a similar button in the wireless station utility within 2 minutes. To add the second wireless station, you have to press these buttons on both device and the wireless station again after the first 2 minutes. Figure 45 WPS Station 

General MAC Filter Advanced QoS WPS WPS Station Add Station by WPS Click the below Push Button to add WPS stations to wireless network. Push Button Or input station's PIN number: Start Note: 1. The Push Button Configuration requires pressing a button on both the station and AP within 120 seconds. 2. You may find the PIN number in the station's utility.

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 36 WPS Station

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Push Button	Use this button when you use the PBC (Push Button Configuration) method to configure wireless stations's wireless settings. See Section 6.2.1 on page 94.Click this to start WPS-aware wireless station scanning and the wireless security information synchronization.
Or input station's PIN number	Use this button when you use the PIN Configuration method to configure wireless station's wireless settings. See Section 6.2.2 on page 95.Type the same PIN number generated in the wireless station's utility. Then click Start to associate to each other and perform the wireless security information synchronization.

Wireless Tutorial

6.1 How to Connect to the Internet from an AP

This section gives you an example of how to set up an access point (AP) and wireless client (a notebook (B), in this example) for wireless communication. B can access the Internet through the AP wirelessly. Figure 46 Wireless AP Connection to the Internet 

B AP Internet

6.2 Configure Wireless Security Using WPS on both your NBG334W and Wireless Client

This section gives you an example of how to set up wireless network using WPS. This example uses the NBG334W as the AP and NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to a notebook.  The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCI card). There are two WPS methods for creating a secure connection. This tutorial shows you how to do both. - Push Button Configuration (PBC) - create a secure wireless network simply by pressing a button. See Section 6.2.1 on page 94. This is the easier method. - PIN Configuration - create a secure wireless network simply by entering a wireless client's PIN (Personal Identification Number) in the NBG334W's interface. See Section 6.2.2 on page 95. This is the more secure method, since one device can authenticate the other.

6.2.1 Push Button Configuration (PBC)

1 Make sure that your NBG334W is turned on and that it is within range of your computer. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client (this example uses the NWD210N) driver and utility in your notebook. 3 In the wireless client utility, find the WPS settings. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (Start or WPS button) 4 Log into NBG334W's web configurator and press the Push Button button in the Network > Wireless Client > WPS Station screen.  Your NBG334W has a WPS button located on its panel, as well as a WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function; you can use one or the other.  It doesn't matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The NBG334W sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG334W securely. The following figure shows you an example to set up wireless network and security by pressing a button on both NBG334W and wireless client (the NWD210N in this example). Figure 47 Example WPS Process: PBC Method 

graph TD
    A["Wireless Client"] --> B["Adaptor Setting"]
    B --> C["Preamble Type: Auto"]
    B --> D["Power Saving Mode: Continuous Access Mode"]
    D --> E["WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)"]
    E --> F["PBC"]
    E --> G["C PN"]
    E --> H["Manual Input"]
    H --> I["Start"]
    J["NBG334W"] --> K["Adaptor Setting"]
    K --> L["WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)"]
    L --> M["Security Info"]
    M --> N["Laptop"]
    M --> O["Wireless Device"]
    N --> P["Communication"]
    O --> P
    P --> Q["Wireless Device"]

6.2.2 PIN Configuration

When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both NBG334W's configuration interface and the client's utilities. 1 Launch your wireless client's configuration utility. go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. 2 Enter the PIN number to the PIN field in the Network > Wireless LAN > WPS Station screen on the NBG334W. 3 Click Start buttons (or button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the NBG334W's WPS Station screen within two minutes. The NBG334W authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. Then the wireless client is able to communicate with the NBG334W securely. The following figure shows you the example to set up wireless network and security on NBG334W and wireless client (ex. NWD210N in this example) by using PIN method. Figure 48 Example WPS Process: PIN Method 

graph TD
    A["Wireless Client"] --> B["Add Station by WPS"]
    B --> C["Authentication by PIN"]
    C --> D["Communication"]
    subgraph Wireless Client
        E["Client: Continuous Access Mode"]
        F["Client: (Used Setup)"]
        G["Client: PIN Manual Input 25327519"]
    end
    subgraph NBG334W
        H["Client: Push Button to add WPS stations"]
        I["Client: Push Button"]
        J["Client: Push Button or input station's PIN number:"]
        K["Note:"]
    end
    subgraph With2 Minutes
        L["Client: Auto"]
        M["Client: Continuous Access Mode"]
        N["Client: (Used Setup)"]
        O["Client: PIN Manual Input 25327519 Start"]
        P["Client: 25327519 Start"]
    end
    style Wireless Client fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style NBG334W fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style With2 Minutes fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    note right of L
        direction TB
        direction left of L
        note right of P
        direction right of L
    end

6.3 Enable and Configure Wireless Security without WPS on your NBG334W

This example shows you how to cofigure wireless security settings with the following parameters on your NBG334W.

SSID	SSID_Example3
Channel	6
Security	WPA-PSK(Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey)

Follow the steps below to configure the wireless settings on your NBG334W. The instructions require that your hardware is connected (see the Quick Start Guide) and you are logged into the web configurator through your LAN connection (see Section 2.2 on page 35). 1 Open the Wireless LAN > General screen in the AP's web configurator. 2 Make sure the Enable Wireless LAN check box is selected. 3 Enter SSID\_Example3 as the SSID and select a channel. 4 Set security mode to WPA-PSK and enter ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey in the Pre-Shared Key field. Click Apply. Figure 49 Network > Wireless LAN > General 

Wireless Setup Enable Wireless LAN Name(SSID) SSID_Example3 Hide SSID Channel Selection Channel-06 2437MHz Operating Channel Channel-006 Security Security Mode WPA-PSK Pre-Shared Key ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey ReAuthentication Timer 1800 (In Seconds) Idle Timeout 3600 (In Seconds) Group Key Update Timer 1800 (In Seconds) Apply Reset

5 Open the Status screen. Verify your wireless and wireless security settings under Device Information and check if the WLAN connection is up under Interface Status. Figure 50 Status: AP Mode 

ZyXEL Status Refresh Interval: None Refresh Now NBG334W Network Maintenance Device Information System Name: NBG334W Firmware Version: V3.60(AMS.2)b2 | 09/21/2007 LAN Information: - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:11 - IP Address: 192.168.1.1 - IP Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 - DHCP: None WLAN Information: - MAC Address: 00:19:cb:22:32:11 - Name(SSID): 7vXEL - Channel: 6 - Operating Channel: 6 - Security Mode: No Security - 802.11 Mode: 802.11b/g - WPS: Unconfigured System Status System Up Time: 3:22:54 Current Date/Time: 2000-1-1/3:22:51 System Resource: -CPU Usage: 6.04% -Memory Usage: 58% System Setting: -Configuration Mode: Advanced Interface Status Summary Packet Statistics (Details...) WLAN Station Status (Details...)

6.4 Configure Your Notebook

 We use the ZyXEL M-302 wireless adapter utility screens as an example for the wireless client. The screens may vary for different models. 1 The NBG334W supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients. Make sure that your notebook or computer's wireless adapter supports one of these standards. 2 Wireless adapters come with software sometimes called a “utility” that you install on your computer. See your wireless adapter’s User’s Guide for information on how to do that. 3 After you've installed the utility, open it. If you cannot see your utility's icon on your screen, go to Start > Programs and click on your utility in the list of programs that appears. The utility displays a list of APs within range, as shown in the example screen below. 4 Select SSID\_Example3 and click Connect. Figure 51 Connecting a Wireless Client to a Wireless Network t 

Available Network List SSID Channel Signal ZyXEL_MIS 6 62% ZyXEL_YZU 6 62% ZyXEL_test 6 60% SSID_Example3 6 56% CPE_5257_00 11 54% Scan Connect Site Information Network Type: Infrastructure Network Mode: 802.11g Channel: 6 Security: VPA-PSK MAC Address: 00:A0:C5:CD:1F:64 Surveyed at: 11:46:38

5 Select WPA-PSK and type the security key in the following screen. Click Next. Figure 52 Security Settings 

Security Settings Encryption Type: WPA-PSK Pre-Shared Key: ThisismyWPA-PSKpre-sharedkey Back Next Exit

6 The Confirm Save window appears. Check your settings and click Save to continue. Figure 53 Confirm Save 

Confirm Save Network Name(SSID): SSID_Example3 Network Type: Infrastructure Network Mode: 802.11b/g Channel: Auto Security: WPA-PSK Back Save Exit

7 Check the status of your wireless connection in the screen below. If your wireless connection is weak or you have no connection, see the Troubleshooting section of this User's Guide. Figure 54 Link Status 

Wireless Network Status Profile Name: Network Name(SSID): SSID_Example3 AP MAC Address: 00:A0:C5:CD:1F:64 Network Type: Infrastructure Transmission Rate: 18 Mbps Security: WPA-PSK Channel: 6 Statistics Transmit Rate: 2 Kbps Receive Rate: 0 Kbps Authentication: None Network Mode: 802.11g Total Transmit: 46 Total Receive: 3 Link Quality: -68 dBm Trend Chart Signal Strength Link Quality

8 If your connection is successful, open your Internet browser and enter http://www.zyxel.com or the URL of any other web site in the address bar. If you are able to access the web site, your wireless connection is successfully configured. This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings.

7.1 WAN Overview

See the chapter about the connection wizard for more information on the fields in the WAN screens.

7.2 WAN MAC Address

The MAC address screen allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the factory default or cloning the MAC address from a computer on your LAN. Choose Factory Default to select the factory assigned default MAC Address. Otherwise, click Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file. It is recommended that you clone the MAC address prior to hooking up the WAN Port.

7.3 Multicast

Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. The NBG334W supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up, the NBG334W queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NBG334W periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NBG334W LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.

7.4 Internet Connection

Use this screen to change your NBG334W's Internet access settings. Click Network > WAN. The screen differs according to the encapsulation you choose.

7.4.1 Ethernet Encapsulation

This screen displays when you select Ethernet encapsulation. Figure 55 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation 

Internet Connection Advanced ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation Ethernet Service Type Standard WAN IP Address Assignment Get automatically from ISP (Default) Use Fixed IP Address IP Address 0.0.0.0 IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP 172.23.5.1 Second DNS Server From ISP 172.23.5.2 Third DNS Server From ISP 0.0.0.0 WAN MAC Address Factory default Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address 192.168.1.33 Set WAN MAC Address 00:13:49:02:95:88 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 37 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: Ethernet Encapsulation

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Encapsulation	You must choose the Ethernet option when the WAN port is used as a regular Ethernet.
Service Type	Choose from Standard, RR-Telstra (RoadRunner Telstra authentication method), RR-Manager (Roadrunner Manager authentication method), RR-Toshiba (Roadrunner Toshiba authentication method) or Telia Login.The following fields do not appear with the Standard service type.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically from ISP	Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
IP Address	Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.
IP Subnet Mask	Enter the IP Subnet Mask in this field.
Gateway IP Address	Enter a Gateway IP Address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
DNS Servers
First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server	Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG334W's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
WAN MAC Address	The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG334W's MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default	Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone the computer's MAC address	Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC Address	Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

7.4.2 PPPoE Encapsulation

The NBG334W supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPP over Ethernet option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the NBG334W (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the NBG334W does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs' computers will have access. This screen displays when you select PPPoE encapsulation. Figure 56 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation 

Internet Connection Advanced ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation PPP over Ethernet Service Name (optional) User Name Password ********** Retype to Confirm ********** □ Nailed-Up Connection Idle Timeout (sec) 100 (in seconds) WAN IP Address Assignment ● Get automatically from ISP (Default) ○ Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address 0.0.0.0 Remote IP Address 0.0.0.0 Remote IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP 172.23.5.1 Second DNS Server From ISP 172.23.5.2 Third DNS Server From ISP 0.0.0.0 WAN MAC Address ● Factory default ○ Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address 192.168.1.33 ○ Set WAN MAC Address 00:13:49:02:95:88 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Encapsulation	The PPP over Ethernet choice is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. The NBG334W supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (i.e. xDSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both the end user and ISP/carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the router rather than individual computers, the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the router does that part of the task. Further, with NAT, all of the LAN's computers will have access.
Service Name	Type the PPPoE service name provided to you. PPPoE uses a service name to identify and reach the PPPoE server.
User Name	Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password	Type the password associated with the user name above.
Retype to Confirm	Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.
Nailed-Up Connection	Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out.
Idle Timeout	This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically from ISP	Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP Address	Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.
Remote IP Address	Enter the remote IP address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
Remote IP Subnet Mask	Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field.
DNS Servers
First DNS Server Second DNS Server Third DNS Server	Select From ISP if your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG334W's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.Select User-Defined if you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you chose User-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0, User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply. If you set a second choice to User-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the second User-Defined changes to None after you click Apply.Select None if you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
WAN MAC Address	The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by using the NBG334W's MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default	Select Factory default to use the factory assigned default MAC Address.

Table 38 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPPoE Encapsulation

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Clone the computer's MAC address	Select Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address and enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC Address	Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

7.4.3 PPTP Encapsulation

Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. This screen displays when you select PPTP encapsulation. Figure 57 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation 

Internet Connection Advanced ISP Parameters for Internet Access Encapsulation PPTP User Name Password ********** Retype to Confirm ********** □ Nailed-Up Connection Idle Timeout (sec) 100 (in seconds) PPTP Configuration ○ Get automatically from ISP (Default) ● Use Fixed IP Address My IP Address 0.0.0.0 My IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 Connection ID/Name WAN IP Address Assignment ● Get automatically from ISP (Default) ○ Use Fixed IP Address My WAN IP Address 0.0.0.0 Remote IP Address 0.0.0.0 Remote IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 DNS Servers First DNS Server From ISP 172.23.5.2 Second DNS Server From ISP 172.23.5.1 Third DNS Server From ISP 0.0.0.0 WAN MAC Address ● Factory default ○ Clone the computer's MAC address - IP Address 192.168.1.33 ○ Set WAN MAC Address 00:13:49:a9:b1:29 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ISP Parameters for Internet Access
Encapsulation	Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a network protocol that enables secure transfer of data from a remote client to a private server, creating a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using TCP/IP-based networks. PPTP supports on-demand, multi-protocol, and virtual private networking over public networks, such as the Internet. The NBG334W supports only one PPTP server connection at any given time.To configure a PPTP client, you must configure the User Name and Password fields for a PPP connection and the PPTP parameters for a PPTP connection.
User Name	Type the user name given to you by your ISP.
Password	Type the password associated with the User Name above.
Retype to Confirm	Type your password again to make sure that you have entered is correctly.
Nailed-up Connection	Select Nailed-Up Connection if you do not want the connection to time out.
Idle Timeout	This value specifies the time in seconds that elapses before the NBG334W automatically disconnects from the PPTP server.
PPTP Configuration
Get automatically from ISP	Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My IP Address	Type the (static) IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
My IP Subnet Mask	Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W.
Server IP Address	Type the IP address of the PPTP server.
Connection ID/Name	Type your identification name for the PPTP server.
WAN IP Address Assignment
Get automatically from ISP	Select this option If your ISP did not assign you a fixed IP address. This is the default selection.
Use Fixed IP Address	Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
My WAN IP Address	Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use Fixed IP Address.
Remote IP Address	Enter the remote IP address (if your ISP gave you one) in this field.
Remote IP Subnet Mask	Enter the remote IP subnet mask in this field.
DNS Servers

Table 39 Network > WAN > Internet Connection: PPTP Encapsulation

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
First DNS ServerSecond DNS ServerThird DNS Server	SelectFrom ISPif your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG334W's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.SelectUser-Definedif you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you choseUser-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0,User-Definedchanges to Noneafter you clickApply.If you set a second choice toUser-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the secondUser-Definedchanges to Noneafter you clickApply.SelectNoneif you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
WAN MAC Address	The MAC address section allows users to configure the WAN port's MAC address by either using the NBG334W's MAC address, copying the MAC address from a computer on your LAN or manually entering a MAC address.
Factory default	SelectFactory defaultto use the factory assigned default MAC Address.
Clone the computer's MAC address	SelectClone the computer's MAC address - IP Addressand enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN whose MAC you are cloning. Once it is successfully configured, the address will be copied to the rom file (ZyNOS configuration file). It will not change unless you change the setting or upload a different ROM file.
Set WAN MAC Address	Select this option and enter the MAC address you want to use.
Apply	ClickApplyto save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	ClickResetto begin configuring this screen afresh.

7.5 Advanced WAN Screen

To change your NBG334W's advanced WAN settings, click Network > WAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 58 Network > WAN > Advanced 

Internet Connection Advanced Multicast Setup Multicast None Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Allow between LAN and WAN Allow Trigger Dial Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 WAN > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Multicast Setup
Multicast	Select IGMP V-1, IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236.
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP): NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN.
Allow between LAN and WAN	Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
Allow Trigger Dial	Select this option to allow NetBIOS packets to initiate calls.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

This chapter describes how to configure LAN settings.

8.1 LAN Overview

A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached. A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area, usually the same building or floor of a building. The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server, manage IP addresses, and partition your physical network into logical networks.

8.1.1 IP Pool Setup

The NBG334W is pre-configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64. This configuration leaves 31 IP addresses (excluding the NBG334W itself) in the lower range (192.168.1.2 to 192.168.1.32) for other server computers, for instance, servers for mail, FTP, TFTP, web, etc., that you may have.

8.1.2 System DNS Servers

Refer to the IP address and subnet mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter.

8.2 LAN TCP/IP

The NBG334W has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.

8.2.1 Factory LAN Defaults

The LAN parameters of the NBG334W are preset in the factory with the following values: - IP address of 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 (24 bits) - DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192.168.1.33. These parameters should work for the majority of installations. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address(es), read the embedded web configurator help regarding what fields need to be configured.

8.2.2 IP Address and Subnet Mask

Refer to the IP address and subnet mask section in the Connection Wizard chapter for this information.

8.2.3 Multicast

Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts (including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. The NBG334W supports both IGMP version 1 (IGMP-v1) and IGMP version 2 (IGMP-v2). At start up, the NBG334W queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the NBG334W periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the NBG334W LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces.

8.2.4 Any IP

Traditionally, you must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the NBG334W to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet (through the NBG334W). In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network, you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the NBG334W. With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled, the NBG334W allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings (such as IP address and subnet mask) of the computer, when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334W are not in the same subnet. Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static (fixed) IP address, you can simply connect the computer to the NBG334W and access the Internet. The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment. In a residential house where a NBG334W is installed, you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings, even when the IP addresses of the computer and the NBG334W are not in the same subnet. Figure 59 Any IP Example 

graph TD
    A["Device 1"] --> B["Router"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    D["Device 2"] --> E["Router"]
    E --> F["Internet"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP address that is in the same subnet as the NBG334W's IP address.  You must enable NAT to use the Any IP feature on the NBG334W. Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address, on the local area network. IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices (the NBG334W) to decide which hop to use, to help forward data along to its specified destination. The following lists out the steps taken, when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the NBG334W. 1 When a computer (which is in a different subnet) first attempts to access the Internet, it sends packets to its default gateway (which is not the NBG334W) by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table. 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway, an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN. 3 The NBG334W receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address. 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table. Once the ARP table is updated, the computer is able to access the Internet through the NBG334W. 5 When the NBG334W receives packets from the computer, it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer. After all the routing information is updated, the computer can access the NBG334W and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the NBG334W.

8.3 LAN IP Screen

Use this screen to change your basic LAN settings. Click Network > LAN. Figure 60 Network > LAN > IP 

IP IP Alias Advanced LAN TCP/IP IP Address 192.168.1.1 IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Network > LAN > IP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
LAN TCP/IP
IP Address	Type the IP address of your NBG334W in dotted decimal notation 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
IP Subnet Mask	The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

8.4 LAN IP Alias

IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The NBG334W supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the NBG334W itself as the gateway for each LAN network. To change your NBG334W's IP alias settings, click Network > LAN > IP Alias. The screen appears as shown. Figure 61 Network > LAN > IP Alias 

IP IP Alias Advanced IP Alias 1 IP Alias 1 IP Address 0.0.0.0 IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 IP Alias 2 IP Alias 2 IP Address 0.0.0.0 IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network > LAN > IP Alias

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
IP Alias 1,2	Select the check box to configure another LAN network for the NBG334W.
IP Address	Enter the IP address of your NBG334W in dotted decimal notation.
IP Subnet Mask	Your NBG334W will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

8.5 Advanced LAN Screen

To change your NBG334W's advanced IP settings, click Network > LAN > Advanced. The screen appears as shown. Figure 62 Network > LAN > Advanced 

IP | IP Alias | Advanced | Multicast Setup Multicast None Any IP Setup Active Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) Allow between LAN and WAN Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network > LAN > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Multicast	Select IGMP V-1 or IGMP V-2 or None. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236.
Any IP Setup
Active	Select this if you want to let computers on different subnets use the NBG334W.
Windows Networking (NetBIOS over TCP/IP): NetBIOS (Network Basic Input/Output System) are TCP or UDP broadcast packets that enable a computer to connect to and communicate with a LAN. For some dial-up services such as PPPoE or PPTP, NetBIOS packets cause unwanted calls. However it may sometimes be necessary to allow NetBIOS packets to pass through to the WAN in order to find a computer on the WAN.
Allow between LAN and WAN	Select this check box to forward NetBIOS packets from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN. If your firewall is enabled with the default policy set to block WAN to LAN traffic, you also need to enable the default WAN to LAN firewall rule that forwards NetBIOS traffic.Clear this check box to block all NetBIOS packets going from the LAN to the WAN and from the WAN to the LAN.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Guest WLAN

Guest WLAN allows you to set up a wireless network where users can access to Internet via the NBG334W (Z), but not other networks connected to the Z. In the following figure, a guest user can access the Internet from the guest wireless network A via Z but not the home or company network N. You can also configure access to be Guest WLAN by using MAC filtering (see Section 9.2 on page 118) and bandwidth management (see Section 9.4 on page 120).  The home or company network N and Guest WLAN network are independent networks. Figure 63 Guest Wireless LAN Network 

graph TD
    A[" Laptop"] -->|Green Path| Z[" Network "]
    Z -->|Red X| Internet[" Internet "]
    style Z fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style Internet fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    subgraph Grid
        N[" Laptop"]
        N1[" Laptop "]
        N2[" Laptop "]
        N3[" Laptop "]
    end
    A -->|A| Z
    N -->|N| Z

This chapter discusses how to configure guest wireless network settings in your NBG334W. See the appendices for more detailed information about wireless networks.  Pure AP mode doesn't support Guest WLAN.

9.1 General Guest WLAN Screen

Click Network > Guest WLAN to open the General screen. Figure 64 Network > Guest WLAN > General 

General MAC Filter IP Bandwidth Guest WLAN Setup Enable Guest WLAN Name(SSID) Guest Hide SSID Security Security Mode No Security Apply Reset

The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen. Table 44 Network > Guest WLAN > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Guest WLAN	Select the check box to activate guest wireless LAN.
Name(SSID)	The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies a wireless station. Wireless stations associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. Use the default SSID (Guest) or enter a unique name in order to distinguish it from other wireless networks in the same area.
Hide SSID	Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Security Mode	Select this to specify the security level for this wireless network. Select Static WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA, WPA-PSK2, or WPA2, the corresponding settings display below. Or select No Security to not apply security setting for this wireless network. See Section 5.5.1 on page 81, Section 5.5.2 on page 81, Section 5.5.3 on page 83, Section 5.5.4 on page 84 for more information.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

9.2 Guest WLAN MAC Filter

The MAC filter screen allows you to configure the NBG334W to give exclusive access (Allow) or exclude devices from accessing the NBG334W's guest wireless network (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC address of the devices to configure this screen. For comparing the NBG334W's Guest WLAN and wireless LAN, see Appendix A on page 229. To change your NBG334W's MAC filter settings for guest wireless network, click Network > Guest WLAN > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 65 Network > Guest WLAN > MAC Filter 

General MAC Filter IP Bandwidth MAC Address Filter Active Filter Action Allow Deny Set MAC Address Set MAC Address 1 00:00:00:00:00 17 00:00:00:00:00 2 00:00:00:00:00 18 00:00:00:00:00 3 00:00:00:00:00 19 00:00:00:00:00 4 00:00:00:00:00 20 00:00:00:00:00 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this menu. Table 45 Network > Guest WLAN > MAC Filter

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Active	Select the check box to enable MAC address filtering for the Guest WLAN.
Filter Action	Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.Select Deny to block access to the NBG334W, MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the NBG334WSelect Allow to permit access to the NBG334W, MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the NBG334W.
Set	This is the index number of the MAC address.
MAC Address	Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless station that are allowed or denied access to the NBG334W in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

9.3 Guest WLAN IP Screen

Click Network > Guest WLAN > IP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 66 Network > Guest WLAN > IP 

General MAC Filter IP Bandwidth Guest WLAN TCP/IP IP Address 192.168.2.1 IP Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 46 Network > Guest WLAN > IP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
IP Address	Type an IP address for the devices on the Guest WLAN using this as the gateway IP address.
IP Subnet Network	Type the subnet mask for the guest wireless LAN.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reload the previous configuration for this screen.

9.4 Guest WLAN Bandwidth Screen

The Bandwidth screen allows you to specify a priority level and restrict the maximum bandwidth for the guest wireless network. Additionally, you can also define bandwidth for your home or office network in the Network > Wireless LAN > Bandwidth. An example is shown next to define maximum bandwidth for your networks (A is Guest WLAN and N is home or company network.) Figure 67 Example: Bandwidth for Different Networks 

graph TD
    subgraph N
        A["Computer"] -->|600 kbps| B["Router"]
        C["Computer"] -->|300 kbps| B
        B --> D["Internet"]
    end
    subgraph A
        E["Computer"] -->|100 kbps| B
        F["Computer"] -->|100 kbps| B
        B --> G["Internet"]
    end

Click Network > Guest WLAN > Bandwidth. The following screen appears. Figure 68 Network > Guest WLAN > Bandwidth 

General MAC Filter IP Bandwidth Bandwidth Management Enable Bandwidth Management for Guest WLAN Priority High Maximum Bandwidth 0 (kbps) Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 47 Network > Guest WLAN > Bandwidth

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Bandwidth Management for Guest WLAN	Select this to turn on bandwidth management for the Guest WLAN network.
Priority	This field displays the priority of the application.High - Typically used for voice or video that can be medium-quality.Mid - Typically used for applications that do not fit into another priority. For example, Internet surfing.Low - Typically used for non-critical “background” applications, such as large file transfers and print jobs that should not affect other applications.
Maximum Bandwidth	Enter a number to specify maximum bandwidth the Guest WLAN network can use.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to reset the changes in this screen.

10.1 DHCP

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the NBG334W's LAN and/or Guest WLAN as DHCP server(s) or disable them. When configured as a server, the NBG334W provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If DHCP service is disabled, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or Guest WLAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.

10.2 DHCP Server General Screen

Click Network > DHCP Server. The following screen displays. Figure 69 Network > DHCP Server > General 

General Advanced Client List LAN DHCP Setup Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192.168.1.33 Pool Size 32 Guest WLAN DHCP Setup Enable DHCP Server IP Pool Starting Address 192.168.2.33 Pool Size 16 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network > DHCP Server > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
LAN DHCP Setup
Enable DHCP Server	Enable or Disable DHCP for LAN or Guest WLAN (See Chapter 9 on page 117).DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients (computers) to obtain TCP/IP configuration at startup from a server. Leave the Enable DHCP Server check box selected unless your ISP instructs you to do otherwise. Clear it to disable the NBG334W acting as a DHCP server. When configured as a server, the NBG334W provides TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If not, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computers must be manually configured. When set as a server, fill in the following four fields.
IP Pool Starting Address	This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool for LAN or Guest WLAN.
Pool Size	This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool for LAN or Guest WLAN.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

10.3 DHCP Server Advanced Screen

This screen allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN or Guest WLAN (See Chapter 9 on page 117) to specific individual computers based on their MAC addresses. You can also use this screen to configure the DNS server information that the NBG334W sends to the DHCP clients. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To change your NBG334W's static DHCP settings, click Network > DHCP Server > Advanced. The following screen displays. Figure 70 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced 

General Advanced Client List Interface Interface Selection LAN LAN Static DHCP Table

MAC Address IP Address

1 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 2 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 3 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 4 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 5 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 6 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 7 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 8 00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 DNS Server DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server First DNS Server DNS Relay 192.168.1.1 Second DNS Server None 0.0.0.0 Third DNS Server None 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 49 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Interface
Interface Selection	Select LAN or Guest WLAN for the settings in this screen.
LAN Static DHCP Table / Guest WAN Static DHCP Table
#	This is the index number of the static IP table entry (row).
MAC Address	Type the MAC address (with colons) of a computer on your LAN.
IP Address	Type the LAN IP address of a computer on your LAN.
DNS Server
DNS Servers Assigned by DHCP Server	The NBG334W passes a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address (in the order you specify here) to the DHCP clients. The NBG334W only passes this information to the LAN DHCP clients when you select the Enable DHCP Server check box. When you clear the Enable DHCP Server check box, DHCP service is disabled and you must have another DHCP sever on your LAN, or else the computers must have their DNS server addresses manually configured.

Table 49 Network > DHCP Server > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
First DNS ServerSecond DNS ServerThird DNS Server	SelectFrom ISPif your ISP dynamically assigns DNS server information (and the NBG334W's WAN IP address). The field to the right displays the (read-only) DNS server IP address that the ISP assigns.SelectUser-Definedif you have the IP address of a DNS server. Enter the DNS server's IP address in the field to the right. If you choseUser-Defined, but leave the IP address set to 0.0.0.0,User-Definedchanges toNoneafter you clickApply.If you set a second choice toUser-Defined, and enter the same IP address, the secondUser-Definedchanges toNoneafter you clickApply.SelectDNS Relayto have the NBG334W act as a DNS proxy. The NBG334W's LAN IP address displays in the field to the right (read-only). The NBG334W tells the DHCP clients on the LAN that the NBG334W itself is the DNS server. When a computer on the LAN sends a DNS query to the NBG334W, the NBG334W forwards the query to the NBG334W's system DNS server (configured in theWAN >Internet Connectionscreen) and relays the response back to the computer. You can only selectDNS Relayfor one of the three servers; if you selectDNS Relayfor a second or third DNS server, that choice changes toNoneafter you clickApply.SelectNoneif you do not want to configure DNS servers. If you do not configure a DNS server, you must know the IP address of a computer in order to access it.
Apply	ClickApplyto save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	ClickResetto begin configuring this screen afresh.

10.4 Client List Screen

The DHCP table shows current DHCP client information (including IP Address, Host Name and MAC Address) of LAN or Guest WLAN network clients using the NBG334W's DHCP servers. Configure this screen to always assign an IP address to a MAC address (and host name). Click Network > DHCP Server > Client List.  You can also view a read-only client list by clicking the DHCP Table (Details...) hyperlink in the Status screen. The following screen displays. Figure 71 Network > DHCP Server > Client List 

General Advanced Client List LAN DHCP Setup

IP Address Host Name MAC Address Reserve

1 192.168.1.35 twpc1 00:00:e8:7c:14:80 Guest WLAN DHCP Setup

IP Address Host Name MAC Address Reserve

1 192.168.2.33 pc12 00:02:e3:56:16:9d Apply Refresh

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 50 Network > DHCP Server > Client List

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This is the index number of the host computer.
IP Address	This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Host Name	This field displays the computer host name.
MAC Address	The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address.
Reserve	Select this check box in the LAN DHCP Setup or Guest WLAN DHCP Setup section to have the NBG334W always assign the IP address(es) to the MAC address(es) (and host name(s)). After you click Apply, the MAC address and IP address also display in the Advanced screen (where you can edit them).
Apply	Click Apply to save your settings.
Refresh	Click Refresh to reload the DHCP table.

Network Address Translation (NAT)

This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the NBG334W.

11.1 NAT Overview

NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet. For example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network is changed to a different IP address known within another network.

11.2 Using NAT

 You must create a firewall rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the NBG334W.

11.2.1 Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers

A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make accessible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single machine to the outside world. Use the Application screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A service request that does not have a server explicitly designated for it is forwarded to the default server. If the default is not defined, the service request is simply discarded.  Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.

11.2.2 Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding Example

Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet Figure 72 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example 

graph TD
    A["Router"] -->|LAN 192.168.1.1| B["Router"]
    A -->|LAN 192.168.1.33| C["Server"]
    D["IP address A: 192.168.1.33"] --> A
    E["IP address B: 192.168.1.34"] --> F["Router"]
    G["IP address c: 192.168.1.35"] --> F
    H["IP address c: 192.168.1.36"] --> F
    I["Internet"] --> J["Router"]

11.3 General NAT Screen

Click Network > NAT to open the General screen. Figure 73 Network > NAT > General 

General Application Advanced NAT Setup Enable Network Address Translation Default Server Setup Default Server 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Network > NAT > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Network Address Translation	Network Address Translation (NAT) allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network (for example a private IP address used in a local network) to a different IP address known within another network (for example a public IP address used on the Internet).Select the check box to enable NAT.
Default Server Setup
Default Server	In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Application screen.If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the NBG334W discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the Application screen or remote management.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

11.4 NAT Application Screen

Port forwarding allows you to define the local servers to which the incoming services will be forwarded. To change your NBG334W's port forwarding settings, click Network > NAT > Application. The screen appears as shown.  If you do not assign a Default Server IP address in the NAT > General screen, the NBG334W discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in this screen or remote management. Refer to Appendix F on page 277 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Figure 74 Network > NAT > Application 

General Application Advanced Game List Update File Path: Browse... Update Add Application Rule Active Service Name User Defined Port (Ex: 10-20,30,40) Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset Application Rules Summary

Active Name Port Server IP Address Modify

1 HTTP 80 10.2.3.4 2 Battlefield 1942 14567,22000,23000-23009,27900,28900 172.12.2.3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 52 NAT Application

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Game List Update	A game list includes the pre-defined service name(s) and port number(s). You can edit and upload it to the NBG334W to replace the existing entries in the second field next to Service Name.
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.
Browse...	Click Browse... to find the.txt file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Update	Click Update to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
Add Application Rule
Active	Select the check box to enable this rule and the requested service can be forwarded to the host with a specified internal IP address.Clear the checkbox to disallow forwarding of these ports to an inside server without having to delete the entry.
Service Name	Type a name (of up to 31 printable characters) to identify this rule in the first field next to Service Name. Otherwise, select a predefined service in the second field next to Service Name. The predefined service name and port number(s) will display in the Service Name and Port fields.
Port	Type a port number(s) to be forwarded.To specify a range of ports, enter a hyphen (-) between the first port and the last port, such as 10-20.To specify two or more non-consecutive port numbers, separate them by a comma without spaces, such as 123,567.
Server IP Address	Type the inside IP address of the server that receives packets from the port(s) specified in the Port field.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes to the Application Rules Summary table.
Reset	Click Reset to not save and return your new changes in the Service Name and Port fields to the previous one.
Application Rules Summary
#	This is the number of an individual port forwarding server entry.
Active	This icon is turned on when the rule is enabled.
Name	This field displays a name to identify this rule.
Port	This field displays the port number(s).
Server IP Address	This field displays the inside IP address of the server.
Modify	Click the Edit icon to display and modify an existing rule setting in the fields under Add Application Rule.Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.

11.4.1 Game List Example

Here is an example game list text file. The index number, service name and associated port(s) are specified by semi-colons (no spaces). Use the name=xxx (where xxx is the service name) to create a new service. Port range can be separated with a hyphen (-) (no spaces). Multiple (non-consecutive) ports can be separated by commas. Figure 75 Game List Example

version=1
1;name=Battlefield 1942;port=14567,22000,23000-23009,27900,28900
2;name=Call of Duty;port=28960
3;name=Civilization IV;port=2056
4;name=Diablo I and II;port=6112-6119,4000
5;name=Doom 3;port=27666
6;name=F.E.A.R;port=27888
7;name=Final Fantasy XI;port=25,80,110,443,50000-65535
8;name=Guild Wars;port=6112,80
9;name=Half Life;port=6003,7002,27005,27010,27011,27015
10;name=Jedi Knight III: Jedi Academy;port=28060-28062,28070-28081
11;name=Need for Speed: Hot Pursuit 2;port=1230,8511-8512,27900,28900,61200-61230
12;name=Neverwinter Nights;port=5120-5300,6500,27900,28900
13;name=Quake 2;port=27910
14;name=Quake 3;port=27660,27960
15;name=Rainbow Six 3: Raven Shield;port=7777-7787,8777-8787
16;name=Serious Sam II;port=25600-25605
17;name=Silent Hunter III;port=17997-18003
18;name=Soldier of Fortune II;port=20100-20112
19;name=Starcraft;port=6112-6119,4000
20;name=Star Trek: Elite Force II;port=29250,29256
21;name=SWAT 4;port=10480-10483
22;name=Warcraft II and III;port=6112-6119,4000
23;name=World of Warcraft;port=3724 

11.5 Trigger Port Forwarding

Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address. Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The NBG334W records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the NBG334W's WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("incoming" port), the NBG334W forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computer's connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.

11.5.1 Trigger Port Forwarding Example

The following is an example of trigger port forwarding. Figure 76 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example 

graph LR
    A["Jane's computer"] --> B["Internet"]
    C["Computer"] --> B
    D["Computer"] --> B
    E["Computer"] --> B
    F["Computer"] --> B
    G["Computer"] --> B
    H["Computer"] --> B
    I["Computer"] --> B
    J["Computer"] --> B
    K["Real Audio server Port 7070"] --> L["Server"]

1 Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070). 2 Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the NBG334W to record Jane’s computer IP address. The NBG334W associates Jane's computer IP address with the "incoming" port range of 6970-7170. 3 The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170. 4 The NBG334W forwards the traffic to Jane's computer IP address. 5 Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The NBG334W times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).

11.5.2 Two Points To Remember About Trigger Ports

1 Trigger events only happen on data that is going coming from inside the NBG334W and going to the outside. 2 If an application needs a continuous data stream, that port (range) will be tied up so that another computer on the LAN can't trigger it.

11.6 NAT Advanced Screen

To change your NBG334W's trigger port settings, click Network > NAT > Advanced. The screen appears as shown.  Only one LAN computer can use a trigger port (range) at a time. Figure 77 Network > NAT > Advanced 

General Application Advanced Session Setup Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User 512 Port Triggering Rules

Name Incoming Trigger

Port End Port Port End Port 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 53 Network > NAT > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User	Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions that a host can create.When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they may use a large number of NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet.Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions each client computer can establish through the NBG334W.If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is using all of the available NAT sessions.
Port Triggering Rules
#	This is the rule index number (read-only).
Name	Type a unique name (up to 15 characters) for identification purposes. All characters are permitted - including spaces.

Table 53 Network > NAT > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Incoming	Incoming is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The NBG334W forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the LAN that requested the service.
Start Port	Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
End Port	Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Trigger	The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the NBG334W to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Start Port	Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
End Port	Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Dynamic DNS

12.1 Dynamic DNS Introduction

Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.

12.1.1 DynDNS Wildcard

Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes \*.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.  If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.

12.2 Dynamic DNS Screen

To change your NBG334W's DDNS, click Network >DDNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 78 Dynamic DNS 

General Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW.DynDNS.ORG Dynamic DNS Type Dynamic DNS Host Name User Name Password Enable Wildcard Option Enable off line option (Only applies to custom DNS) IP Address Update Policy: Use WAN IP Address Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address Use specified IP Address 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 54 Dynamic DNS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Dynamic DNS	Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Service Provider	Select the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Dynamic DNS Type	Select the type of service that you are registered for from your Dynamic DNS service provider.
Host Name	Enter a host names in the field provided. You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (",").
User Name	Enter your user name.
Password	Enter the password assigned to you.
Enable Wildcard Option	Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard.
Enable off line option	This option is available when CustomDNS is selected in the DDNS Type field. Check with your Dynamic DNS service provider to have traffic redirected to a URL (that you can specify) while you are off line.
IP Address Update Policy:
Use WAN IP Address	Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) to the WAN IP address.
Dynamic DNS server auto detect IP Address	Select this option to update the IP address of the host name(s) automatically by the DDNS server. It is recommended that you select this option.
Use specified IP Address	Type the IP address of the host name(s). Use this if you have a static IP address.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

PART III

Security

Firewall (143) Content Filtering (149) This chapter gives some background information on firewalls and explains how to get started with the NBG334W's firewall.

13.1 Introduction to ZyXEL's Firewall

13.1.1 What is a Firewall?

Originally, the term “firewall” referred to a construction technique designed to prevent the spread of fire from one room to another. The networking term "firewall" is a system or group of systems that enforces an access-control policy between two networks. It may also be defined as a mechanism used to protect a trusted network from a network that is not trusted. Of course, firewalls cannot solve every security problem. A firewall is one of the mechanisms used to establish a network security perimeter in support of a network security policy. It should never be the only mechanism or method employed. For a firewall to guard effectively, you must design and deploy it appropriately. This requires integrating the firewall into a broad information-security policy. In addition, specific policies must be implemented within the firewall itself.

13.1.2 Stateful Inspection Firewall

Stateful inspection firewalls restrict access by screening data packets against defined access rules. They make access control decisions based on IP address and protocol. They also "inspect" the session data to assure the integrity of the connection and to adapt to dynamic protocols. These firewalls generally provide the best speed and transparency; however, they may lack the granular application level access control or caching that some proxies support. Firewalls, of one type or another, have become an integral part of standard security solutions for enterprises.

13.1.3 About the NBG334W Firewall

The NBG334W firewall is a stateful inspection firewall and is designed to protect against Denial of Service attacks when activated (click the General tab under Firewall and then click the Enable Firewall check box). The NBG334W's purpose is to allow a private Local Area Network (LAN) to be securely connected to the Internet. The NBG334W can be used to prevent theft, destruction and modification of data, as well as log events, which may be important to the security of your network. The NBG334W is installed between the LAN and a broadband modem connecting to the Internet. This allows it to act as a secure gateway for all data passing between the Internet and the LAN. The NBG334W has one Ethernet WAN port and four Ethernet LAN ports, which are used to physically separate the network into two areas. The WAN (Wide Area Network) port attaches to the broadband (cable or DSL) modem to the Internet. The LAN (Local Area Network) port attaches to a network of computers, which needs security from the outside world. These computers will have access to Internet services such as e-mail, FTP and the World Wide Web. However, "inbound access" is not allowed (by default) unless the remote host is authorized to use a specific service.

13.1.4 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall

1 Change the default password via web configurator. 2 Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way, including attaching a modem to the port. 3 Limit who can access your router. 4 Don't enable any local service (such as SNMP or NTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 5 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. 6 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. 7 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room.

13.2 Triangle Routes

If an alternate gateway on the LAN has an IP address in the same subnet as the NBG334W's LAN IP address, return traffic may not go through the NBG334W. This is called an asymmetrical or “triangle” route. This causes the NBG334W to reset the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. You can have the NBG334W permit the use of asymmetrical route topology on the network (not reset the connection). Allowing asymmetrical routes may let traffic from the WAN go directly to the LAN without passing through the NBG334W. A better solution is to use IP alias to put the NBG334W and the backup gateway on separate subnets.

13.2.1 Triangle Routes and IP Alias

You can use IP alias instead of allowing triangle routes. IP Alias allow you to partition your network into logical sections over the same interface. By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the NBG334W to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario. 1 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. 2 The NBG334W reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2. 3 The reply from the WAN goes to the NBG334W. 4 The NBG334W then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1. Figure 79 Using IP Alias to Solve the Triangle Route Problem 

graph TD
    LAN["LAN"] -->|1| Subnet1["Subnet 1"]
    LAN -->|4| Subnet2["Subnet 2"]
    Subnet1 -->|2| Subnet2
    Subnet2 -->|3| A["A"]
    Subnet1 -->|ISP 1| WAN["WAN"]
    Subnet2 -->|ISP 2| Internet["Internet"]
    LAN -->|ISP 1| Internet

13.3 General Firewall Screen

Click Security > Firewall to open the General screen. Use this screen to enable or disable the NBG334W's firewall, and set up firewall logs. Figure 80 Security > Firewall > General I 

General Services Firewall Setup Enable Firewall Packet Direction Log LAN to WAN No Log WAN to LAN No Log LAN to Guest WLAN No Log Guest WLAN to LAN No Log Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 55 Security > Firewall > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Firewall	Select this check box to activate the firewall. The NBG334W performs access control and protects against Denial of Service (DoS) attacks when the firewall is activated.
Packet Direction	This is the direction of travel of packets.Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Log	Select whether to create a log for packets that are traveling in the selected direction when the packets are blocked (Log All) or forwarded (Log Forward). Or select Not Log to not log any records.To log packets related to firewall rules, make sure that Access Control under Log is selected in the Logs > Log Settings screen.
Apply	Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset	Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.

13.4 Services Screen

Click Security > Firewall > Services. The screen appears as shown next. If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your NBG334W, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the NBG334W exists. Use this screen to prevent the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your NBG334W when unsupported ports are probed. You can also use this screen to enable service blocking, enter/delete/modify the services you want to block and the date/time you want to block them. Figure 81 Security > Firewall > Services 

General Services ICMP Respond to Ping on LAN & WAN & Guest WLAN ✓ Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services Firewall Rule

Active Service Name IP Schedule\Log.Modify

Add=new rule before rule 1_(rule number). Move rule 1_to rule 1_(rule number). Misc setting ✓ Bypass Triangle Route Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User 512 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 56 Security > Firewall > Services

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
ICMP	Internet Control Message Protocol is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user.
Respond to Ping on	The NBG334W will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Select Guest WLAN to reply to incoming Guest WLAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN & Guest WLAN to reply to all incoming LAN, WAN and Guest WLAN Ping requests.
Do not respond to requests for unauthorized services	Select this option to prevent hackers from finding the NBG334W by probing for unused ports. If you select this option, the NBG334W will not respond to port request(s) for unused ports, thus leaving the unused ports and the NBG334W unseen. By default this option is not selected and the NBG334W will reply with an ICMP Port Unreachable packet for a port probe on its unused UDP ports, and a TCP Reset packet for a port probe on its unused TCP ports.Note that the probing packets must first traverse the NBG334W's firewall mechanism before reaching this anti-probing mechanism. Therefore if the firewall mechanism blocks a probing packet, the NBG334W reacts based on the firewall policy, which by default, is to send a TCP reset packet for a blocked TCP packet. You can use the command "sys firewall tcprst rst [on|off]" to change this policy. When the firewall mechanism blocks a UDP packet, it drops the packet without sending a response packet.
Service Setup
Enable Services Blocking	Select this check box to enable this feature.
Available Services	This is a list of pre-defined services (ports) you may prohibit your LAN computers from using. Select the port you want to block using the drop-down list and click Add to add the port to the Blocked Services field.
Blocked Services	This is a list of services (ports) that will be inaccessible to computers on your LAN once you enable service blocking.
Custom Port	A custom port is a service that is not available in the pre-defined Available Services list and you must define using the next two fields.
Type	Choose the IP port (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box.
Port Number	Enter the port number range that defines the service. For example, if you want to define the Gnutella service, then select TCP type and enter a port range from 6345 to 6349.
Add	Select a service from the Available Services drop-down list and then click Add to add a service to the Blocked Services
Delete	Select a service from the Blocked Services list and then click Delete to remove this service from the list.
Clear All	Click Clear All to empty the Blocked Services.
Schedule to Block
Day to Block:	Select a check box to configure which days of the week (or everyday) you want service blocking to be active.
Time of Day to Block (24-Hour Format)	Select the time of day you want service blocking to take effect. Configure blocking to take effect all day by selecting All Day. You can also configure specific times by selecting From and entering the start time in the Start (hour) and Start (min) fields and the end time in the End (hour) and End (min) fields. Enter times in 24-hour format, for example, "3:00pm" should be entered as "15:00".

Table 56 Security > Firewall > Services

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Misc setting
Bypass Triangle Route	Select this check box to have the NBG334W firewall ignore the use of triangle route topology on the network.
Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User	Type a number ranging from 1 to 2048 to limit the number of NAT/firewall sessions that a host can create.
Apply	Click Apply to save the settings.
Reset	Click Reset to start configuring this screen again.

Content Filtering

This chapter provides a brief overview of content filtering using the embedded web GUI.

14.1 Introduction to Content Filtering

Internet content filtering allows you to create and enforce Internet access policies tailored to your needs. Content filtering is the ability to block certain web features or specific URL keywords.

14.2 Restrict Web Features

The NBG334W can block web features such as ActiveX controls, Java applets, cookies and disable web proxies.

14.3 Days and Times

The NBG334W also allows you to define time periods and days during which the NBG334W performs content filtering.

14.4 Filter Screen

Click Security > Content Filter to open the Filter screen. Figure 82 Security > Content Filter > Filter 

Filter Schedule Trusted IP Setup A trusted computer has full access to all blocked resources, 0.0.0.0 means there is no trusted computer. Trusted Computer IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Restrict Web Features ActiveX Java Cookies Web Proxy Keyword Blocking Enable URL Keyword Blocking Keyword Add Keyword List bad gambling Delete Clear All Message to display when a site is blocked Denied Access Message Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 57 Security > Content Filter > Filter

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Trusted Computer IP Address	To enable this feature, type an IP address of any one of the computers in your network that you want to have as a trusted computer. This allows the trusted computer to have full access to all features that are configured to be blocked by content filtering.Leave this field blank to have no trusted computers.
Restrict Web Features	Select the box(es) to restrict a feature. When you download a page containing a restricted feature, that part of the web page will appear blank or grayed out.
ActiveX	A tool for building dynamic and active Web pages and distributed object applications. When you visit an ActiveX Web site, ActiveX controls are downloaded to your browser, where they remain in case you visit the site again.
Java	A programming language and development environment for building downloadable Web components or Internet and intranet business applications of all kinds.
Cookies	Used by Web servers to track usage and provide service based on ID.
Web Proxy	A server that acts as an intermediary between a user and the Internet to provide security, administrative control, and caching service. When a proxy server is located on the WAN it is possible for LAN users to circumvent content filtering by pointing to this proxy server.
Keyword Blocking
Enable URL Keyword Blocking	The NBG334W can block Web sites with URLs that contain certain keywords in the domain name or IP address. For example, if the keyword "bad" was enabled, all sites containing this keyword in the domain name or IP address will be blocked, e.g., URL http://www.website.com/bad.html would be blocked. Select this check box to enable this feature.

Table 57 Security > Content Filter > Filter

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Keyword	Type a keyword in this field. You may use any character (up to 64 characters). Wildcards are not allowed. You can also enter a numerical IP address.
Keyword List	This list displays the keywords already added.
Add	Click Add after you have typed a keyword.Repeat this procedure to add other keywords. Up to 64 keywords are allowed.When you try to access a web page containing a keyword, you will get a message telling you that the content filter is blocking this request.
Delete	Highlight a keyword in the lower box and click Delete to remove it. The keyword disappears from the text box after you click Apply.
Clear All	Click this button to remove all of the listed keywords.
Denied Access Message	Enter a message to be displayed when a user tries to access a restricted web site. The default message is “Please contact your network administrator!!”
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh

14.5 Schedule

Use this screen to set the day(s) and time you want the NBG334W to use content filtering. Click Security > Content Filter > Schedule. The following screen displays. Figure 83 Security > Content Filter > Schedule 

Filter Schedule Schedule to Block Day to Block ✓ Everyday □ Sun □ Mon □ Tue □ Wed □ Thu □ Fri □ Sat Time of Day to Block (24-Hour Format) ● All day ○ From : Start 0 (hour) 0 (min) End 0 (hour) 0 (min) Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Security > Content Filter > Schedule

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Day to Block	Select check boxes for the days that you want the NBG334W to perform content filtering. Select theEverydaycheck box to have content filtering turned on all days of the week.
Time of Day to Block(24-Hour Format)	Time of Day to Blockallows the administrator to define during which time periods content filtering is enabled.Time of Day to Blockrestrictions only apply to the keywords (see above). Restrict web server data, such as ActiveX, Java, Cookies and Web Proxy are not affected.SelectAll Dayto have content filtering always active on the days selected inDay to Blockwith time of day limitations not enforced.SelectFromand enter the time period, in 24-hour format, during which content filtering will be enforced.

Table 58 Security > Content Filter > Schedule

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh

14.6 Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking

You can use commands to set how much of a website's URL the content filter is to check for keyword blocking. See the appendices for information on how to access and use the command interpreter.

14.6.1 Domain Name or IP Address URL Checking

By default, the NBG334W checks the URL's domain name or IP address when performing keyword blocking. This means that the NBG334W checks the characters that come before the first slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, content filtering only searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw.

14.6.2 Full Path URL Checking

Full path URL checking has the NBG334W check the characters that come before the last slash in the URL. For example, with the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php, full path URL checking searches for keywords within www.zyxel.com.tw/news/. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 6 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's full path.

14.6.3 File Name URL Checking

Filename URL checking has the NBG334W check all of the characters in the URL. For example, filename URL checking searches for keywords within the URL www.zyxel.com.tw/news/pressroom.php. Use the ip urlfilter customize actionFlags 8 [disable | enable] command to extend (or not extend) the keyword blocking search to include the URL's complete filename.

PART IV

Management

Static Route Screens (155) Bandwidth Management (159) Remote Management (169) Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP) (175)

Static Route Screens

This chapter shows you how to configure static routes for your NBG334W.

15.1 Static Route Overview

Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected, and the NBG334W has no knowledge of the networks beyond. For instance, the NBG334W knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node router R1. However, the NBG334W is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it doesn't know that there is a route through the same remote node router R1 (via gateway router R2). The static routes are for you to tell the NBG334W about the networks beyond the remote nodes. Figure 84 Example of Static Routing Topology 

graph LR
    A["Computer 1"] --> B["Router"]
    C["Computer 2"] --> B
    D["Computer 3"] --> B
    B --> E["R1"]
    E --> F["R2"]
    F --> G["N3"]

15.2 IP Static Route Screen

Click Management > Static Route to open the IP Static Route screen. The following screen displays. Figure 85 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route

#	Name	Active	Destination	Gateway	Modify
1	-	-	...	...
2	test		1, 2, 3, 4	10, 1, 2, 25
3	-	-	...	...
4	-	-	...	...
5	-	-	...	...
6	-	-	...	...
7	-	-	...	...
8	-	-	...	...

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
#	This is the index number of an individual static route. The first entry is for the default route and not editable.
Name	This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Active	This icon is turned on when this static route is active.Click theEditicon underModifyand select theActivecheckbox in theStatic Route Setupscreen to enable the static route. Clear the checkbox to disable this static route without having to delete the entry.
Destination	This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number.
Gateway	This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG334W that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334W; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes.
Modify	Click theEditicon to open the static route setup screen. Modify a static route or create a new static route in theStatic Route Setupscreen.Click theRemoveicon to delete a static route.

15.2.1 Static Route Setup Screen

To edit a static route, click the edit icon under Modify. The following screen displays. Fill in the required information for each static route. Figure 86 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup 

Static Route Setup Route Name Active Private Destination IP Address 0.0.0.0 IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 Gateway IP Address 0.0.0.0 Metric 2 Apply Cancel

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Management > Static Route > IP Static Route: Static Route Setup

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Route Name	Enter the name of the IP static route. Leave this field blank to delete this static route.
Active	This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Private	This parameter determines if the NBG334W will include this route to a remote node in its RIP broadcasts.Select this check box to keep this route private and not included in RIP broadcasts. Clear this checkbox to propagate this route to other hosts through RIP broadcasts.
Destination IP Address	This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID.
IP Subnet Mask	Enter the IP subnet mask here.
Gateway IP Address	Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your NBG334W that will forward the packet to the destination. On the LAN, the gateway must be a router on the same segment as your NBG334W; over the WAN, the gateway must be the IP address of one of the Remote Nodes.
Metric	Metric represents the “cost” of transmission for routing purposes. IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost, with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks. Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link. The number need not be precise, but it must be between 1 and 15. In practice, 2 or 3 is usually a good number.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Cancel	Click Cancel to return to the previous screen and not save your changes.

Bandwidth Management

This chapter contains information about configuring bandwidth management, editing rules and viewing the NBG334W's bandwidth management logs.

16.1 Bandwidth Management Overview

ZyXEL's Bandwidth Management allows you to specify bandwidth management rules based on an application and/or subnet. You can allocate specific amounts of bandwidth capacity (bandwidth budgets) to different bandwidth rules. The NBG334W applies bandwidth management to traffic that it forwards out through an interface. The NBG334W does not control the bandwidth of traffic that comes into an interface. Bandwidth management applies to all traffic flowing out of the router, regardless of the traffic's source. Traffic redirect or IP alias may cause LAN-to-LAN traffic to pass through the NBG334W and be managed by bandwidth management. - The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WAN interface (LAN to WAN, WLAN to WAN, WAN to WAN / NBG334W) must be less than or equal to the Upstream Bandwidth that you configure in the Bandwidth Management Advanced screen. - The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the LAN port (WAN to LAN, WLAN to LAN, LAN to LAN / NBG334W) must be less than or equal to 100,000 kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the LAN port). - The sum of the bandwidth allotments that apply to the WLAN port (LAN to WLAN, WAN to WLAN, WLAN to WLAN / NBG334W) must be less than or equal to 54,000 kbps (you cannot configure the bandwidth budget for the WLAN port).

16.2 Application-based Bandwidth Management

You can create bandwidth classes based on individual applications (like VoIP, Web, FTP, E-mail and Video for example).

16.3 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management

You can create bandwidth classes based on subnets. The following figure shows LAN subnets. You could configure one bandwidth class for subnet A and another for subnet B. Figure 87 Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example 

graph TD
    subgraph LAN
        A["Router"] --> B["Computer"]
        A --> C["Computer"]
        A --> D["Computer"]
        A --> E["Computer"]
        A --> F["Computer"]
        A --> G["Computer"]
    end
    subgraph WAN
        H["Internet"] --> I["Router"]
        I --> J["Computer"]
        I --> K["Computer"]
        I --> L["Computer"]
    end
    A -->|A 192.168.1.1-192.168.1.24| A
    A -->|B 192.168.2.1-192.168.2.24| B

16.4 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management

You could also create bandwidth classes based on a combination of a subnet and an application. The following example table shows bandwidth allocations for application specific traffic from separate LAN subnets. Table 61 Application and Subnet-based Bandwidth Management Example

TRAFFIC TYPE	FROM SUBNET A	FROM SUBNET B
VoIP	64 Kbps	64 Kbps
Web	64 Kbps	64 Kbps
FTP	64 Kbps	64 Kbps
E-mail	64 Kbps	64 Kbps
Video	64 Kbps	64 Kbps

16.5 Bandwidth Management Priorities

The following table describes the priorities that you can apply to traffic that the NBG334W forwards out through an interface. Table 62 Bandwidth Management Priorities

PRIORITY LEVELS: TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED.
High	Typically used for voice traffic or video that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).

Table 62 Bandwidth Management Priorities

PRIORITY LEVELS: TRAFFIC WITH A HIGHER PRIORITY GETS THROUGH FASTER WHILE TRAFFIC WITH A LOWER PRIORITY IS DROPPED IF THE NETWORK IS CONGESTED.
Mid	Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
Low	This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.

16.6 Predefined Bandwidth Management Services

The following is a description of the services that you can select and to which you can apply media bandwidth management using the wizard screens. Table 63 Media Bandwidth Management Setup: Services

SERVICE	DESCRIPTION
Xbox Live	This is Microsoft's online gaming service that lets you play multiplayer Xbox games on the Internet via broadband technology. Xbox Live uses port 3074.
VoIP (SIP)	Sending voice signals over the Internet is called Voice over IP or VoIP. Session Initiated Protocol (SIP) is an internationally recognized standard for implementing VoIP. SIP is an application-layer control (signaling) protocol that handles the setting up, altering and tearing down of voice and multimedia sessions over the Internet.SIP is transported primarily over UDP but can also be transported over TCP, using the default port number 5060.
FTP	File Transfer Program enables fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. FTP uses port number 21.
E-Mail	Electronic mail consists of messages sent through a computer network to specific groups or individuals. Here are some default ports for e-mail:POP3 - port 110IMAP - port 143SMTP - port 25HTTP - port 80
BitTorrent	BitTorrent is a free P2P (peer-to-peer) sharing tool allowing you to distribute large software and media files using ports 6881 to 6889. BitTorrent requires you to search for a file with a searching engine yourself. It distributes files by corporation and trading, that is, the client downloads the file in small pieces and share the pieces with other peers to get other half of the file.
MSN Webcam	MSN messenger allows you to chat online and send instant messages. If you use MSN messenger and also have a webcam, you can send your image/photo in real-time along with messages
WWW	The World Wide Web (WWW) is an Internet system to distribute graphical, hyper-linked information, based on Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) - a client/server protocol for the World Wide Web. The Web is not synonymous with the Internet; rather, it is just one service on the Internet. Other services on the Internet include Internet Relay Chat and Newsgroups. The Web is accessed through use of a browser.

16.6.1 Services and Port Numbers

The commonly used services and port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Next to the name of the service, two fields appear in brackets. The first field indicates the IP protocol type (TCP, UDP, or ICMP). The second field indicates the IP port number that defines the service. (Note that there may be more than one IP protocol type. For example, look at the DNS service. (UDP/TCP:53) means UDP port 53 and TCP port 53. Table 64 Commonly Used Services

SERVICE	DESCRIPTION
AIM/New-ICQ(TCP:5190)	AOL's Internet Messenger service, used as a listening port by ICQ.
AUTH(TCP:113)	Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP(TCP:179)	Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT(UDP:68)	DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER(UDP:67)	DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME(TCP/UDP:7648, 24032)	A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software.
DNS(UDP/TCP:53)	Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
FINGER(TCP:79)	Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP(TCP:20.21)	File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323(TCP:1720)	NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP(TCP:80)	Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS(TCP:443)	HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.
ICQ(UDP:4000)	This is a popular Internet chat program.
IKE(UDP:500)	The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.
IPSEC_TUNNEL(AH:0)	The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service.
IPSEC_TUNNEL(ESP:0)	The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.
IRC(TCP/UDP:6667)	This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger(TCP:1863)	Microsoft Networks' messenger service uses this protocol.
MULTICAST(IGMP:0)	Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
NEW-ICQ(TCP:5190)	An Internet chat program.
NEWS(TCP:144)	A protocol for news groups.
NFS(UDP:2049)	Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.
NNTP(TCP:119)	Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING(ICMP:0)	Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3(TCP:110)	Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).
PPTP(TCP:1723)	Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL(GRE:0)	Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD(TCP:512)	Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO(TCP:7070)	A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.

Table 64 Commonly Used Services

SERVICE	DESCRIPTION
REXEC(TCP:514)	Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN(TCP:513)	Remote Login.
RTELNET(TCP:107)	Remote Telnet.
RTSP(TCP/UDP:554)	The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP(TCP:115)	Simple File Transfer Protocol.
SMTP(TCP:25)	Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.
SNMP(TCP/UDP:161)	Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS(TCP/UDP:162)	Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET(TCP:1521)	Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.
SSH(TCP/UDP:22)	Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS(UDP:1558)	Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG(UDP:514)	Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.
TACACS(UDP:49)	Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET(TCP:23)	Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.
TFTP(UDP:69)	Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE(TCP:7000)	Another videoconferencing solution.

16.7 Default Bandwidth Management Classes and Priorities

If you enable bandwidth management but do not configure a rule for critical traffic like VoIP, the voice traffic may then get delayed due to insufficient bandwidth. With the automatic traffic classifier feature activated, the NBG334W automatically assigns a default bandwidth management class and priority to traffic that does not match any of the user-defined rules. The traffic is classified based on the traffic type. Real-time traffic always gets higher priority over other traffic. The following table shows you the priorities between the three default classes (AutoClass\_H, AutoClass\_M and Default Class) and user-defined rules. 6 is the highest priority. Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes

CLASS TYPE	PRIORITY
User-defined with high priority	6
AutoClass_H	5
User-defined with medium priority	4

Table 65 Bandwidth Management Priority with Default Classes

CLASS TYPE	PRIORITY
AutoClass_M	3
User-defined with low priority	2
Default Class	1

16.8 Bandwidth Management General Configuration

Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT to open the bandwidth management General screen. Figure 88 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General 

General Advanced Monitor Service Management ✓ Enable Bandwidth Management ✓ Enable Automatic Traffic Classifier Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 66 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable Bandwidth Management	Select this check box to have the NBG334W apply bandwidth management. Enable bandwidth management to give traffic that matches a bandwidth rule priority over traffic that does not match a bandwidth rule.Enabling bandwidth management also allows you to control the maximum or minimum amounts of bandwidth that can be used by traffic that matches a bandwidth rule.
Enable Automatic Traffic Classifier	This field is only applicable when you select the Enable Bandwidth Management check box.Select this check box to have the NBG334W base on the default bandwidth classes to apply bandwidth management. Real-time packets, such as VoIP traffic always get higher priority.
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

16.9 Bandwidth Management Advanced Configuration

Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced to open the bandwidth management Advanced screen. Figure 89 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced 

General Advanced Monitor Management Bandwidth Check my upstream bandwidth Detection 0kbps Upstream Bandwidth 100000 (kbps)(10 kbps reserved) Application List

Enable Service Priority Advanced Setting

1 ☐ XBox Live High ☑ 2 ☐ VoIP (SIP) High ☑ 3 ☐ FTP High ☑ 4 ☐ E-Mail High ☑ 5 ☐ BitTorrent High ☑ 6 ☐ MSN Webcam High ☑ 7 ☐ WWW High ☑ User-defined Service

Enable Direction Service Name Priority Modify

1 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 2 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 3 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 4 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 5 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 6 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 7 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 8 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 9 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ 10 ☐ To LAN ☑ High ☑ Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Check my upstream bandwidth	Click theDetectionbutton to check the size of your upstream bandwidth.
Upstream Bandwidth (kbps)	Enter the amount of bandwidth in kbps (2 to 100,000) that you want to allocate for traffic. 20 kbps to 20,000 kbps is recommended.The recommendation is to set this speed to be equal to or less than the speed of the broadband device connected to the WAN port. For example, set the speed to 1000 Kbps (or less) if the broadband device connected to the WAN port has an upstream speed of 1000 Kbps.
Application List	Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth based on the pre-defined service.
#	This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Enable	Select this check box to have the NBG334W apply this bandwidth management rule.
Service	This is the name of the service.
Priority	Select a priority from the drop down list box. ChooseHigh,MidorLow.
Advanced Setting	Click theEditicon to open theRule Configurationscreen where you can modify the rule.
User-defined Service	Use this table to allocate specific amounts of bandwidth to specific applications and/or subnets.
#	This is the number of an individual bandwidth management rule.
Enable	Select this check box to have the NBG334W apply this bandwidth management rule.
Direction	Select To LAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334W forwards to the LAN.Select To WAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334W forwards to the WAN.Select To WLAN to apply bandwidth management to traffic that the NBG334W forwards to the WLAN.
Service Name	Enter a descriptive name of up to 19 alphanumeric characters, including spaces.
Priority	Select a priority from the drop down list box. Choose High, Mid or Low.
Modify	Click the Edit icon to open the Rule Configuration screen. Modify an existing rule or create a new rule in the Rule Configuration screen. See Section 16.9.1 on page 167 for more information.Click the Remove icon to delete a rule.
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

16.9.1 Rule Configuration

If you want to edit a bandwidth management rule for other applications and/or subnets, click the Edit icon in the Application List or User-defined Service table of the Advanced screen. The following screen displays. Figure 90 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration 

Rule Configuration BW Budget Minimum Bandwidth ▼ 10 (kbps) Destination Address 0.0.0.0 Destination Subnet Netmask 0.0.0.0 Destination Port 0 Source Address 0.0.0.0 Source Subnet Netmask 0.0.0.0 Source Port 0 Protocol User defined ▼ 0 OK Cancel

The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Advanced: User-defined Service Rule Configuration

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
BW Budget	Select Maximum Bandwidth or Minimum Bandwidth and specify the maximum or minimum bandwidth allowed for the rule in kilobits per second.
Destination Address	Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Destination Subnet Netmask	Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Destination Address. Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting.
Destination Port	Enter the port number of the destination. See Table 64 on page 163 for some common services and port numbers.
Source Address	Enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Source Subnet Netmask	Enter the destination subnet mask. This field is N/A if you do not specify a Source Address. Refer to the appendices for more information on IP subnetting.
Source Port	Enter the port number of the source. See Table 64 on page 163 for some common services and port numbers.
Protocol	Select the protocol (TCP or UDP) or select User defined and enter the protocol (service type) number.
OK	Click OK to save your customized settings.
Cancel	Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.

16.10 Bandwidth Management Monitor

Click Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor to open the bandwidth management Monitor screen. View the bandwidth usage of the WAN configured bandwidth rules. This is also shown as bandwidth usage over the bandwidth budget for each rule. The gray section of the bar represents the percentage of unused bandwidth and the blue color represents the percentage of bandwidth in use. Figure 91 Management > Bandwidth MGMT > Monitor 

General Advanced Monitor Monitor AutoClass_H 0 % 0 / 100000 kbps AutoClass_M 0 % 0 / 100000 kbps Default Class 0 % 0 / 100000 kbps

Remote Management

This chapter provides information on the Remote Management screens.

17.1 Remote Management Overview

Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which NBG334W interface (if any) from which computers.  When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. See the firewall chapters for details on configuring firewall rules. You may manage your NBG334W from a remote location via: - Internet (WAN only) • ALL (LAN and WAN) • LAN only - Neither (Disable).  When you choose WAN or LAN & WAN, you still need to configure a firewall rule to allow access. To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field. You may only have one remote management session running at a time. The NBG334W automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts. The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows. 1 Telnet 2 HTTP

17.1.1 Remote Management Limitations

Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when: 1 You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. 2 The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the NBG334W will disconnect the session immediately. 3 There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running. You may only have one remote management session running at one time. 4 There is a firewall rule that blocks it.

17.1.2 Remote Management and NAT

When NAT is enabled: - Use the NBG334W's WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. - Use the NBG334W's LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN.

17.1.3 System Timeout

There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes (three hundred seconds). The NBG334W automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period. The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling. You can change the timeout period in the System screen

17.2 WWW Screen

To change your NBG334W's World Wide Web settings, click Management > Remote MGMT to display the WWW screen. Figure 92 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW 

WWW Telnet FTP DNS WWW Server Port 80 Server Access LAN Secured Client IP Address All Selected 0.0.0.0 Note: 1. For UPnP to function normally, the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP. Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Management > Remote MGMT > WWW

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access	Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG334W using this service.
Secured Client IP Address	A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the NBG334W using this service.Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334W using this service.Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG334W using this service.
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

17.3 Telnet

You can configure your NBG334W for remote Telnet access as shown next. The administrator uses Telnet from a computer on a remote network to access the NBG334W. Figure 93 Telnet Configuration on a TCP/IP Network 

graph LR
    A["LAN"] --> B["Router"]
    B --> C["Desktop"]
    B --> D["Desktop"]
    B --> E["Desktop"]
    B --> F["Desktop"]
    B --> G["Desktop"]
    B --> H["Desktop"]
    B --> I["Desktop"]
    B --> J["Desktop"]
    B --> K["Internet"]
    K --> L["Desktop"]
    L --> M["User telnets into the LAN"]
    style K fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style T fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style V fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style Y fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style Z fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AA fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AB fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AC fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AD fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AE fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AF fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AG fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AH fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AI fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AJ fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AK fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AL fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AM fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AN fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AO fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AP fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AQ fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AR fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AS fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AT fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AU fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style AV fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style AW fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style AX fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

17.4 Telnet Screen

To change your NBG334W's Telnet settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet. The following screen displays. Figure 94 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet 

WWW Telnet FTP DNS Telnet Server Port 23 Server Access LAN Secured Client IP Address All Selected 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Management > Remote MGMT > Telnet

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access	Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG334W using this service.
Secured Client IP Address	A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the NBG334W using this service.Select All to allow any computer to access the NBG334W using this service.Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG334W using this service.
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

17.5 FTP Screen

You can upload and download the NBG334W's firmware and configuration files using FTP, please see the chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. To change your NBG334W's FTP settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > FTP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 95 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP 

WWW Telnet FTP DNS FTP Server Port 21 Server Access LAN Secured Client IP Address All Selected 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 71 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Server Port	You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Server Access	Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the NBG334W using this service.
Secured Client IP Address	A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to communicate with the NBG334W using this service.SelectAllto allow any computer to access the NBG334W using this service.ChooseSelectedto just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to access the NBG334W using this service.

Table 71 Management > Remote MGMT > FTP

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

17.6 DNS Screen

Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Refer to the chapter on Wizard Setup for background information. To change your NBG334W's DNS settings, click Management > Remote MGMT > DNS. The screen appears as shown. Figure 96 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS 

WWW Telnet FTP DNS DNS Service Port 53 Service Access LAN Secured Client IP Address All Selected 0.0.0.0 Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 72 Management > Remote MGMT > DNS

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Server Port	The DNS service port number is 53 and cannot be changed here.
Server Access	Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the NBG334W.
Secured Client IP Address	A secured client is a “trusted” computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the NBG334W.Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the NBG334W.Choose Selected to just allow the computer with the IP address that you specify to send DNS queries to the NBG334W.
Apply	Click Apply to save your customized settings and exit this screen.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP)

This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator.

18.1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play

Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See Section 18.3 on page 176 for configuration instructions.

18.1.1 How do I know if I'm using UPnP?

UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.

18.1.2 NAT Traversal

UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following: • Dynamic port mapping - Learning public IP addresses - Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the NAT chapter for more information on NAT.

18.1.3 Cautions with UPnP

The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the NBG334W allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.

18.2 UPnP and ZyXEL

ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnPTM Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. See the following sections for examples of installing and using UPnP.

18.3 UPnP Screen

Click the Management > UPnP to display the UPnP screen. Figure 97 Management > UPnP > General 

General UPnP Setup Device Name: ZyXEL NBG-334W Internet Sharing Gateway Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall Note: For UPnP to function normally, the HTTP service must be available for LAN computers using UPnP. Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 73 Management > UPnP > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Enable the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Feature	Select this check box to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the NBG334W's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP	Select this check box to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the NBG334W so that they can communicate through the NBG334W, for example by using NAT traversal, UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application.
Allow UPnP to pass through Firewall	Select this check box to allow traffic from UPnP-enabled applications to bypass the firewall.Clear this check box to have the firewall block all UPnP application packets (for example, MSN packets).

Table 73 Management > UPnP > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Apply	Click Apply to save the setting to the NBG334W.
Cancel	Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings.

18.4 Installing UPnP in Windows Example

This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.

18.4.0.1 Installing UPnP in Windows Me

Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box. Click Details. Figure 98 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication 

Add/Remove Programs Properties Install/Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add or remove a component, select or clear the check box. If the check box is shaded, only part of the component will be installed. To see what's included in a component, click Details. Components: Address Book 1.7 MB Communications 5.6 MB Desktop Themes 0.0 MB Games 10.1 MB Multilanguage Support 0.0 MB Space used by installed components: 42.4 MB Space required: 0.0 MB Space available on disk: 866.3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services. 5 of 10 components selected Details... Have Disk... OK Cancel Apply

3 In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box. Figure 99 Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components 

Communications To install a component, select the check box next to the component name, or clear the check box if you do not want to install it. A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed. To see what's included in a component, click Details. Components: ✓ NetMeeting 4.2 MB ✓ Phone Dialer 0.2 MB ✓ Universal Plug and Play 0.4 MB ☐ Virtual Private Networking 0.0 MB Space used by installed components: 42.4 MB Space required: 0.0 MB Space available on disk: 866.3 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances. Details... OK Cancel

4 Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click Next. 5 Restart the computer when prompted.

Installing UPnP in Windows XP

Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP. 1 Click Start and Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components .... Figure 100 Network Connections 

Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Back Address Network Connections Network Tasks Advanced Help Operator-Assisted Dialing Dial-up Preferences... Network Identification... Bridge Connections Advanced Settings... Optional Networking Components...

4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays. Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details. Figure 101 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard 

Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP. To add or remove a component, click the checkbox. A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed. To see what's included in a component, click Details. Components: □ Management and Monitoring Tools 1.9 MB ✓ Networking Services 0.3 MB □ Other Network File and Print Services 0.0 MB Description: Contains a variety of specialized, network-related services and protocols. Total disk space required: 0.0 MB Space available on disk: 260.9 MB Details... < Back Next > Cancel

5 In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box. Figure 102 Networking Services 

Networking Services To add or remove a component, click the check box. A shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed. To see what's included in a component, click Details. Subcomponents of Networking Services: RIP Listener 0.0 MB Simple TCP/IP Services 0.0 MB Universal Plug and Play 0.2 MB Description: Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices. Total disk space required: 0.0 MB Space available on disk: 260.8 MB Details... OK Cancel

6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next.

18.4.0.2 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example

This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the NBG334W. Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the NBG334W. Turn on your computer and the NBG334W.

Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device

1 Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway. 2 Right-click the icon and select Properties. Figure 103 Network Connections 

Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back Search Folders Address Network Connections Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection Internet Gateway Internet Connection Enabled Internet Connection LAN or H Disable Status Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties

3 In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created. Figure 104 Internet Connection Properties 

Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using: Internet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer. Settings... ✓ Show icon in notification area when connected OK Cancel

4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings. Figure 105 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings 

Advanced Settings Services Select the services: running on your network, that. Internet users can access. Services ✓ msnsgs (192.168.1.66.9610) 16003 TCP ✓ msnsgs (192.168.1.66.9659) 27111 UDP ✓ msnsgs (192.168.1.91.7281) 35037 UDP ✓ msnsgs (192.168.1.91.7810) 31711 TCP Add... Edit... Delete OK Cancel

Figure 106 Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add 

Service Settings Description of service: Test Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer hosting this service on your network: 192.168.1.11 External Port number for this service: 143 Internal Port number for this service: 143 TCP UDP OK Cancel

5 When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically. 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK. An icon displays in the system tray. Figure 107 System Tray Icon 

Internet Connection is now connected Click here for more information... 6:43 PM

7 Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status. Figure 108 Internet Connection Status 

Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Status: Connected Duration: 00:00:56 Speed: 100.0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer Packets: Sent: 8 618 Received: 5,943 746 Properties Disable Close

Web Configurator Easy Access

With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the NBG334W without finding out the IP address of the NBG334W first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the NBG334W. Follow the steps below to access the web configurator. 1 Click Start and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Network Connections. 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places. Figure 109 Network Connections 

Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back Search Folders Address Network Connections Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network See Also Network Troubleshooter Other Places Control Panel My Network Places My Documents My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Internet Gateway Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection LAN or High-Speed Internet Local Area Connection Enabled Accton EN1207D-TX PCI Fast ...

4 An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local Network. 5 Right-click on the icon for your NBG334W and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays. Figure 110 Network Connections: My Network Places 

My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Folders Address My Network Places Network Tasks Add a network place View network connections Set up a home or small office network View workgroup computers Local Network ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Invoke Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Other Places

6 Right-click on the icon for your NBG334W and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the NBG334W. Figure 111 Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example 

ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway General ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Manufacturer: ZyXEL Model Name: ZyXEL Internet Sharing Gateway Model Number: P-31 Description: ZyXEL P-31 Internet Sharing Gateway Device Address: http://192.168.1.1/ Close Cancel

PART V

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

System (189) Logs (193) Tools (207) Configuration Mode (213) Sys Op Mode (215) Language (219) Troubleshooting (221) This chapter provides information on the System screens.

19.1 System Overview

See the chapter about wizard setup for more information on the next few screens.

19.2 System General Screen

Click Maintenance > System. The following screen displays. Figure 112 Maintenance > System > General 

General Time Setting System Setup System Name Domain Name Administrator Inactivity Timer 5 (minutes, 0 means no timeout) Password Setup Old Password ****** New Password ****** Retype to Confirm ****** Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Maintenance > System > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
System Name	System Name is a unique name to identify the NBG334W in an Ethernet network. It is recommended you enter your computer’s “Computer name” in this field (see the chapter about wizard setup for how to find your computer’s name). This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long. Spaces are not allowed, but dashes “-” and underscores ”_” are accepted.
Domain Name	Enter the domain name (if you know it) here. If you leave this field blank, the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP.The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name.

Table 74 Maintenance > System > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Administrator Inactivity Timer	Type how many minutes a management session can be left idle before the session times out. The default is 5 minutes. After it times out you have to log in with your password again. Very long idle timeouts may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended).
Password Setup	Change your NBG334W's password (recommended) using the fields as shown.
Old Password	Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field.
New Password	Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays an asterisk (*) for each character you type.
Retype to Confirm	Type the new password again in this field.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

19.3 Time Setting Screen

To change your NBG334W's time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the NBG334W's time based on your local time zone. Figure 113 Maintenance > System > Time Setting 

General Time Setting Current Time and Date Current Time 05:21:14 Current Date 2000-01-01 Time and Date Setup ● Manual New Time (hh:mm:ss) 5 ; 20 ; 21 New Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 2000 / 1 / 1 ○ Get from Time Server ● Auto ○ User Defined Time Server Address Time Zone Setup Time Zone: (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London □ Daylight Savings Start Date First Saturday of January (2000-01-01) at 0 o'clock End Date First Saturday of January (2000-01-01) at 0 o'clock Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 75 Maintenance > System > Time Setting

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Current Time and Date
Current Time	This field displays the time of your NBG334W.Each time you reload this page, the NBG334W synchronizes the time with the time server.
Current Date	This field displays the date of your NBG334W.Each time you reload this page, the NBG334W synchronizes the date with the time server.
Time and Date Setup
Manual	Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it.
New Time (hh:mm:ss)	This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually.When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply.
New Date (yyyy/mm/dd)	This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually.When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply.
Get from Time Server	Select this radio button to have the NBG334W get the time and date from the time server you specified below.
Auto	Select Auto to have the NBG334W automatically search for an available time server and synchronize the date and time with the time server after you click Apply.
User Defined Time Server Address	Select User Defined Time Server Address and enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time Zone Setup
Time Zone	Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Savings	Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Start Date	Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the first Sunday of April. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, April and type 2 in the o'clock field.Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Table 75 Maintenance > System > Time Setting

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
End Date	Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selectedDaylight Savings. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would selectLast, Sunday, Octoberand type 2 in theo'clockfield.Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would selectLast, Sunday, October. The time you type in theo'clockfield depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).
Apply	ClickApplyto save your changes back to the NBG334W.
Reset	ClickResetto begin configuring this screen afresh.

This chapter contains information about configuring general log settings and viewing the NBG334W's logs. Refer to the appendices for example log message explanations.

20.1 View Log

The web configurator allows you to look at all of the NBG334W's logs in one location. Click Maintenance > Logs to open the View Log screen. Use the View Log screen to see the logs for the categories that you selected in the Log Settings screen (see Section 20.2 on page 194). Options include logs about system maintenance, system errors, access control, allowed or blocked web sites, blocked web features (such as ActiveX controls, Java and cookies), attacks (such as DoS) and IPSec. Log entries in red indicate system error logs. The log wraps around and deletes the old entries after it fills. Click a column heading to sort the entries. A triangle indicates ascending or descending sort order. Figure 114 Maintenance > Logs > View Log

#	Time ▼	Message	Source	Destination	Note
1	04/06/2006 14:28:47	Successful WEB login	192.168.1.33		User:admin
2	04/06/2006 14:18:15	Time synchronization successful
3	04/06/2006 14:18:15	Time initialized by NTP server: ntp3.cs.wisc.edu	128.105.37.11:123	172.23.23.114:123
4	04/06/2006 14:17:13	Time synchronization successful
5	04/06/2006 14:17:13	Time initialized by NTP server: ntp3.cs.wisc.edu	128.105.37.11:123	172.23.23.114:123
6	04/06/2006 06:11:52	Time synchronization successful
7	04/06/2006 06:11:52	Time initialized by NTP server: time1.stupi.se	192.36.143.150:123	172.23.23.114:123
8	01/01/2000 04:50:52	WAN interface gets IP:172.23.23.114			WAN1
9	01/01/2000 04:23:06	Successful WEB login	192.168.1.33		User:admin
10	01/01/2000 03:43:10	Waiting content filter server (66.35.255.70) timeout!	192.168.1.33:3241	202.43.201.234:80	tw.f172.mail.yahoo.com
11	01/01/2000 03:42:02	Waiting content filter server (66.35.255.70) timeout!	192.168.1.33:3188	203.84.196.97:80	tw.yimg.com

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Maintenance > Logs > View Log

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Display	The categories that you select in the Log Settings page (see Section 20.2 on page 194) display in the drop-down list box.Select a category of logs to view; select All Logs to view logs from all of the log categories that you selected in the Log Settings page.
Email Log Now	Click Email Log Now to send the log screen to the e-mail address specified in the Log Settings page (make sure that you have first filled in the Address Info fields in Log Settings).
Refresh	Click Refresh to renew the log screen.
Clear Log	Click Clear Log to delete all the logs.
Time	This field displays the time the log was recorded. See the chapter on system maintenance and information to configure the NBG334W's time and date.
Message	This field states the reason for the log.
Source	This field lists the source IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.
Destination	This field lists the destination IP address and the port number of the incoming packet.
Note	This field displays additional information about the log entry.

20.2 Log Settings

You can configure the NBG334W's general log settings in one location. Click Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings to open the Log Settings screen. Use the Log Settings screen to configure to where the NBG334W is to send logs; the schedule for when the NBG334W is to send the logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the NBG334W to send. An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites or web sites with restricted web features such as cookies, active X and so on. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Alerts are e-mailed as soon as they happen. Logs may be e-mailed as soon as the log is full (see Log Schedule). Selecting many alert and/or log categories (especially Access Control) may result in many e-mails being sent. Figure 115 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings 

View Log Log Settings E-mail Log Settings Mail Server Mail Subject Send Log to Send Alerts to □ SMTP Authentication User Name Password Log Schedule None Day for Sending Log Sunday Time for Sending Log 0 (hour) 0 (minute) □ Clear log after sending mail Syslog Logging □ Active Syslog Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 (Server NAME or IP Address) Log Facility Local 1 Active Log and Alert Log ✓ System Maintenance ✓ System Errors □ Access Control □ TCP Reset □ Packet Filter □ ICMP □ Remote Management ✓ CDR ✓ PPP □ UPnP □ Forward Web Sites □ Blocked Web Sites □ Blocked Java etc. □ Attacks □ 802.1x □ Wireless □ Any IP Send immediate alert □ System Errors □ Access Control □ Blocked Web Sites □ Blocked Java etc. □ Attacks Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server	Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Mail Subject	Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the log e-mail message that the NBG334W sends. Not all NBG334W models have this field.
Send Log To	The NBG334W sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field. If this field is left blank, the NBG334W does not send logs via e-mail.

Table 77 Maintenance > Logs > Log Settings

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Send Alerts To	Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs. Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
SMTP Authentication	SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the e-mail logs.
User Name	Enter the user name (up to 31 characters) (usually the user name of a mail account).
Password	Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Log Schedule	This drop-down menu is used to configure the frequency of log messages being sent as E-mail:DailyWeeklyHourlyWhen Log is FullNone.If you select Weekly or Daily, specify a time of day when the E-mail should be sent. If you select Weekly, then also specify which day of the week the E-mail should be sent. If you select When Log is Full, an alert is sent when the log fills up. If you select None, no log messages are sent.
Day for Sending Log	Use the drop down list box to select which day of the week to send the logs.
Time for Sending Log	Enter the time of the day in 24-hour format (for example 23:00 equals 11:00 pm) to send the logs.
Clear log after sending mail	Select the checkbox to delete all the logs after the NBG334W sends an E-mail of the logs.
Syslog Logging	The NBG334W sends a log to an external syslog server.
Active	Click Active to enable syslog logging.
Syslog Server IP Address	Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs.
Log Facility	Select a location from the drop down list box. The log facility allows you to log the messages to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the syslog server manual for more information.
Active Log and Alert
Log	Select the categories of logs that you want to record.
Send Immediate Alert	Select log categories for which you want the NBG334W to send E-mail alerts immediately.
Apply	Click Apply to save your changes.
Reset	Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

20.3 Log Descriptions

This section provides descriptions of example log messages. Table 78 System Maintenance Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
Time calibration is successful	The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server.
Time calibration failed	The router failed to get information from the time server.
WAN interface gets IP:%s	A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up server.
DHCP client IP expired	A DHCP client's IP address has expired.
DHCP server assigns%s	The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client.
Successful WEB login	Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface.
WEB login failed	Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface.
Successful TELNET login	Someone has logged on to the router via telnet.
TELNET login failed	Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet.
Successful FTP login	Someone has logged on to the router via ftp.
FTP login failed	Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp.
NAT Session Table is Full!	The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full.
Starting Connectivity Monitor	Starting Connectivity Monitor.
Time initialized by Daytime Server	The router got the time and date from the Daytime server.
Time initialized by Time server	The router got the time and date from the time server.
Time initialized by NTP server	The router got the time and date from the NTP server.
Connect to Daytime server fail	The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server.
Connect to Time server fail	The router was not able to connect to the Time server.
Connect to NTP server fail	The router was not able to connect to the NTP server.
Too large ICMP packet has been dropped	The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large.
Configuration Change: PC = 0x%x, Task ID = 0x%x	The router is saving configuration changes.
Successful SSH login	Someone has logged on to the router's SSH server.
SSH login failed	Someone has failed to log on to the router's SSH server.
Successful HTTPS login	Someone has logged on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol.
HTTPS login failed	Someone has failed to log on to the router's web configurator interface using HTTPS protocol.

Table 79 System Error Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
%s exceeds the max.number of session per host!	This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host.
setNetBIOSFilter: calloc error	The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.
readNetBIOSFilter: calloc error	The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings.
WAN connection is down.	A WAN connection is down. You cannot access the network through this interface.

Table 80 Access Control Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
Firewall default policy: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the default policy's setting.
Firewall rule [NOT] match: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF],	Attempted TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF access matched (or did not match) a configured firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.
Triangle route packet forwarded: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.
Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry.
Router sent blocked web site message: TCP	The router sent a message to notify a user that the router blocked access to a web site that the user requested.

Table 81 TCP Reset Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
Under SYN flood attack, sent TCP RST	The router sent a TCP reset packet when a host was under a SYN flood attack (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.)
Exceed TCP MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST	The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of TCP incomplete connections exceeded the user configured threshold. (the TCP incomplete count is per destination host.) Note: Refer to TCP Maximum Incomplete in the Firewall Attack Alerts screen.
Peer TCP state out of order, sent TCP RST	The router sent a TCP reset packet when a TCP connection state was out of order. Note: The firewall refers to RFC793 Figure 6 to check the TCP state.
Firewall session time out, sent TCP RST	The router sent a TCP reset packet when a dynamic firewall session timed out.The default timeout values are as follows:ICMP idle timeout: 3 minutesUDP idle timeout: 3 minutesTCP connection (three way handshaking) timeout: 270 secondsTCP FIN-wait timeout: 2 MSL (Maximum Segment Lifetime set in the TCP header).TCP idle (established) timeout (s): 150 minutesTCP reset timeout: 10 seconds
Exceed MAX incomplete, sent TCP RST	The router sent a TCP reset packet when the number of incomplete connections (TCP and UDP) exceeded the user-configured threshold. (Incomplete count is for all TCP and UDP connections through the firewall.)Note: When the number of incomplete connections (TCP + UDP) > “Maximum Incomplete High”, the router sends TCP RST packets for TCP connections and destroys TOS (firewall dynamic sessions) until incomplete connections < “Maximum Incomplete Low”.
Access block, sent TCP RST	The router sends a TCP RST packet and generates this log if you turn on the firewall TCP reset mechanism (via CI command: "sys firewall tcprst").

Table 82 Packet Filter Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
[TCP | UDP | ICMP | IGMP | Generic] packet filter matched (set:%d, rule:%d)	Attempted access matched a configured filter rule (denoted by its set and rule number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule.

Table 83 ICMP Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
Firewall default policy: ICMP,,	ICMP access matched the default policy and was blocked or forwarded according to the user's setting. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
Firewall rule [NOT] match: ICMP,,	ICMP access matched (or didn't match) a firewall rule (denoted by its number) and was blocked or forwarded according to the rule. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
Triangle route packet forwarded: ICMP	The firewall allowed a triangle route session to pass through.
Packet without a NAT table entry blocked: ICMP	The router blocked a packet that didn't have a corresponding NAT table entry.
Unsupported/out-of-order ICMP: ICMP	The firewall does not support this kind of ICMP packets or the ICMP packets are out of order.
Router reply ICMP packet: ICMP	The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender.

Table 84 CDR Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
board%d line%d channel%d, call%d,%s C01 Outgoing Call dev=%x ch=%x%s	The router received the setup requirements for a call. “call” is the reference (count) number of the call. “dev” is the device type (3 is for dial-up, 6 is for PPPoE, 10 is for PPTP). "channel" or “ch” is the call channel ID.For example,"board 0 line 0 channel 0, call 3, C01 Outgoing Call dev=6 ch=0 "Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times.
board%d line%d channel%d, call%d,%s C02 OutCall Connected%d%s	The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call is connected.
board%d line%d channel%d, call%d,%s C02 Call Terminated	The PPPoE, PPTP or dial-up call was disconnected.

Table 85 PPP Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
ppp:LCP Starting	The PPP connection's Link Control Protocol stage has started.
ppp:LCP Opening	The PPP connection's Link Control Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:CHAP Opening	The PPP connection's Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:IPCP Starting	The PPP connection's Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting.
ppp:IPCP Opening	The PPP connection's Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening.
ppp:LCP Closing	The PPP connection's Link Control Protocol stage is closing.
ppp:IPCP Closing	The PPP connection's Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing.

Table 86 UPnP Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
UPnP pass through Firewall	UPnP packets can pass through the firewall.

Table 87 Content Filtering Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
%s: Keyword blocking	The content of a requested web page matched a user defined keyword.
%s: Not in trusted web list	The web site is not in a trusted domain, and the router blocks all traffic except trusted domain sites.
%s: Forbidden Web site	The web site is in the forbidden web site list.
%s: Contains ActiveX	The web site contains ActiveX.
%s: Contains Java applet	The web site contains a Java applet.
%s: Contains cookie	The web site contains a cookie.
%s: Proxy mode detected	The router detected proxy mode in the packet.
%s	The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list, but it did not return the category type.
%s:%s	The content filter server responded that the web site is in the blocked category list, and returned the category type.
%s (cache hit)	The system detected that the web site is in the blocked list from the local cache, but does not know the category type.
%s:%s (cache hit)	The system detected that the web site is in blocked list from the local cache, and knows the category type.
%s: Trusted Web site	The web site is in a trusted domain.
%s	When the content filter is not on according to the time schedule or you didn't select the "Block Matched Web Site" check box, the system forwards the web content.
Waiting content filter server timeout	The external content filtering server did not respond within the timeout period.
DNS resolving failed	The NBG334W cannot get the IP address of the external content filtering via DNS query.
Creating socket failed	The NBG334W cannot issue a query because TCP/IP socket creation failed, port:port number.
Connecting to content filter server fail	The connection to the external content filtering server failed.
License key is invalid	The external content filtering license key is invalid.

Table 88 Attack Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
attack [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF attack.
attack ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP attack. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
land [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	The firewall detected a TCP/UDP/IGMP/ESP/GRE/OSPF land attack.
land ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP land attack. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
ip spoofing - WAN [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	The firewall detected an IP spoofing attack on the WAN port.
ip spoofing - WAN ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP IP spoofing attack on the WAN port. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
icmp echo: ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP echo attack. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
syn flood TCP	The firewall detected a TCP syn flood attack.
ports scan TCP	The firewall detected a TCP port scan attack.
teardrop TCP	The firewall detected a TCP teardrop attack.
teardrop UDP	The firewall detected an UDP teardrop attack.
teardrop ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP teardrop attack. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
illegal command TCP	The firewall detected a TCP illegal command attack.
NetBIOS TCP	The firewall detected a TCP NetBIOS attack.
ip spoofing - no routing entry [TCP | UDP | IGMP | ESP | GRE | OSPF]	The firewall classified a packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack.
ip spoofing - no routing entry ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall classified an ICMP packet with no source routing entry as an IP spoofing attack.
vulnerability ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP vulnerability attack. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.
traceroute ICMP (type:%d, code:%d)	The firewall detected an ICMP traceroute attack. For type and code details, see Table 92 on page 204.

Table 89 PKI Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
Enrollment successful	The SCEP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination field records the certification authority server IP address and port.
Enrollment failed	The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority server's IP address and port.
Failed to resolve	The SCEP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server's address cannot be resolved.
Enrollment successful	The CMP online certificate enrollment was successful. The Destination field records the certification authority server's IP address and port.
Enrollment failed	The CMP online certificate enrollment failed. The Destination field records the certification authority server's IP address and port.
Failed to resolve	The CMP online certificate enrollment failed because the certification authority server's IP address cannot be resolved.
Rcvd ca cert:	The router received a certification authority certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd user cert:	The router received a user certificate, with subject name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd CRL:	The router received a CRL (Certificate Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose IP address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd ARL:	The router received an ARL (Authority Revocation List), with size and issuer name as recorded, from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Failed to decode the received ca cert	The router received a corrupted certification authority certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Failed to decode the received user cert	The router received a corrupted user certificate from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Failed to decode the received CRL	The router received a corrupted CRL (Certificate Revocation List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Failed to decode the received ARL	The router received a corrupted ARL (Authority Revocation List) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field.
Rcvd datatoo large! Max size allowed:	The router received directory data that was too large (the size is listed) from the LDAP server whose address and port are recorded in the Source field. The maximum size of directory data that the router allows is also recorded.
Cert trusted:	The router has verified the path of the certificate with the listed subject name.
Due to, cert not trusted:	Due to the reasons listed, the certificate with the listed subject name has not passed the path verification. The recorded reason codes are only approximate reasons for not trusting the certificate. Please see Table 92 on page 204 for the corresponding descriptions of the codes.

Table 90 802.1X Logs

LOG MESSAGE	DESCRIPTION
Local User Database accepts user.	A user was authenticated by the local user database.
Local User Database reports user credential error.	A user was not authenticated by the local user database because of an incorrect user password.
Local User Database does not find user's credential.	A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database.
RADIUS accepts user.	A user was authenticated by the RADIUS Server.
RADIUS rejects user. Pls check RADIUS Server.	A user was not authenticated by the RADIUS Server. Please check the RADIUS Server.
Local User Database does not support authentication method.	The local user database only supports the EAP-MD5 method. A user tried to use another authentication method and was not authenticated.
User logout because of session timeout expired.	The router logged out a user whose session expired.
User logout because of user deassociation.	The router logged out a user who ended the session.
User logout because of no authentication response from user.	The router logged out a user from which there was no authentication response.
User logout because of idle timeout expired.	The router logged out a user whose idle timeout period expired.
User logout because of user request.	A user logged out.
Local User Database does not support authentication method.	A user tried to use an authentication method that the local user database does not support (it only supports EAP-MD5).
No response from RADIUS. Pls check RADIUS Server.	There is no response message from the RADIUS server, please check the RADIUS server.
Use Local User Database to authenticate user.	The local user database is operating as the authentication server.
Use RADIUS to authenticate user.	The RADIUS server is operating as the authentication server.
No Server to authenticate user.	There is no authentication server to authenticate a user.
Local User Database does not find user's credential.	A user was not authenticated by the local user database because the user is not listed in the local user database.

Table 91 ACL Setting Notes

PACKET DIRECTION	DIRECTION	DESCRIPTION
(L to W)	LAN to WAN	ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the WAN.
(W to L)	WAN to LAN	ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the LAN.
(L to L/P)	LAN to LAN/NBG334W	ACL set for packets traveling from the LAN to the LAN or the NBG334W.
(W to W/P)	WAN to WAN/NBG334W	ACL set for packets traveling from the WAN to the WAN or the NBG334W.

Table 92 ICMP Notes

TYPE	CODE	DESCRIPTION
0		Echo Reply
	0	Echo reply message
3		Destination Unreachable
	0	Net unreachable
	1	Host unreachable
	2	Protocol unreachable
	3	Port unreachable
	4	A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don't Fragment (DF)
	5	Source route failed
4		Source Quench
	0	A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network.
5		Redirect
	0	Redirect datagrams for the Network
	1	Redirect datagrams for the Host
	2	Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network
	3	Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host
8		Echo
	0	Echo message
11		Time Exceeded
	0	Time to live exceeded in transit
	1	Fragment reassembly time exceeded
12		Parameter Problem
	0	Pointer indicates the error
13		Timestamp
	0	Timestamp request message
14		Timestamp Reply
	0	Timestamp reply message
15		Information Request
	0	Information request message
16		Information Reply
	0	Information reply message

Table 93 Syslog Logs

LOG MESSAGE

DESCRIPTION

"This message is sent by the system ("RAS" displays as the system name if you haven't configured one) when the router generates a syslog. The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU->LOGS->Log Settings page. The severity is the log's syslog class. The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix. The "devID" is the last three characters of the MAC address of the router's LAN port. The "cat" is the same as the category in the router's logs.

The following table shows RFC-2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays. Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type. Table 94 RFC-2408 ISAKMP Payload Types

LOG DISPLAY	PAYLOAD TYPE
SA	Security Association
PROP	Proposal
TRANS	Transform
KE	Key Exchange
ID	Identification
CER	Certificate
CER_REQ	Certificate Request
HASH	Hash
SIG	Signature
NONCE	Nonce
NOTFY	Notification
DEL	Delete
VID	Vendor ID

This chapter shows you how to upload a new firmware, upload or save backup configuration files and restart the NBG334W.

21.1 Firmware Upload Screen

Find firmware at www.zyxel.com in a file that (usually) uses the system model name with a "\*.bin" extension, e.g., "NBG334W.bin". The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for upgrading firmware using FTP/TFTP commands. Click Maintenance > Tools. Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your NBG334W. Figure 116 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware 

Firmware Configuration Restart Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware, browse to the location of the binary (.BIN) upgrade file and click Upload. Upgrade files can be downloaded from website. If the upgrade file is compressed (.ZIP file), you must first extract the binary (.BIN) file. In some cases, you may need to reconfigure File Path: Browse... Upload

The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 95 Maintenance > Tools > Firmware

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it.
Browse...	Click Browse... to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Upload	Click Upload to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.

 Do not turn off the NBG334W while firmware upload is in progress! After you see the Firmware Upload In Process screen, wait two minutes before logging into the NBG334W again. Figure 117 Upload Warning 

ZyXEL Firmware Upload In Process Please Wait ... Please wait for the device to finish restarting(PWR LED is on steady). This should take about two minutes. To access the device after a successful firmware upload, you need to log in again. Check your new firmware version in the system status menu.

The NBG334W automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 118 Network Temporarily Disconnected 

Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged

After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Firmware screen. Figure 119 Upload Error Message 

system Upload Firmware upload error! The uploaded file was not accepted by the device. Please return to the previous page and select a valid upgrade file. Click Help for more information. Return

21.2 Configuration Screen

See the Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance chapter for transferring configuration files using FTP/TFTP commands. Click Maintenance > Tools > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears as shown next. Figure 120 Maintenance > Tools > Configuration 

Firmware Configuration Restart Backup Configuration Click Backup to save the current configuration of your system to your computer. Backup Restore Configuration To restore a previously saved configuration file to your system, browse to the location of the configuration file and click upload. File Path: Browse... Upload Back to Factory Defaults Click Reset to clear all user-entered configuration information and return to factory defaults. After resetting, the - Password will be 1234 - LAN IP address will be 192.168.1.1 - DHCP will be reset to server Reset

21.2.1 Backup Configuration

Backup configuration allows you to back up (save) the NBG334W's current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your NBG334W is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the NBG334W's current configuration to your computer.

21.2.2 Restore Configuration

Restore configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your NBG334W. Table 96 Maintenance Restore Configuration

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
File Path	Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or clickBrowse...to find it.
Browse...	ClickBrowse...to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload	ClickUploadto begin the upload process.

 Do not turn off the NBG334W while configuration file upload is in progress After you see a “configuration upload successful” screen, you must then wait one minute before logging into the NBG334W again. Figure 121 Configuration Restore Successful 

ZyXEL Restore Configuration successful The Device Is Rebooting Now. After the device finishes rebooting, the login screen displays.

The NBG334W automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 122 Temporarily Disconnected 

Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged

If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default NBG334W IP address (192.168.1.1). See your Quick Start Guide for details on how to set up your computer's IP address. If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click Return to go back to the Configuration screen. Figure 123 Configuration Restore Error 

System Restore Restore configuration error! The configuration file was not accepted by the device. Please return to the previous page and select a valid configuration file. Click Help for more information. Return

21.2.3 Back to Factory Defaults

Pressing the Reset button in this section clears all user-entered configuration information and returns the NBG334W to its factory defaults. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your NBG334W. Refer to the chapter about introducing the web configurator for more information on the RESET button.

21.3 Restart Screen

System restart allows you to reboot the NBG334W without turning the power off. Click Maintenance > Tools > Restart. Click Restart to have the NBG334W reboot. This does not affect the NBG334W's configuration. Figure 124 Maintenance > Tools > Restart 

Firmware Configuration Restart System Restart Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart. The SYS(or PWR) LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful. Wait a minute before logging into the device again. Restart

Configuration Mode

Click Maintenance > Config Mode to open the following screen. This screen allows you to hide or display the advanced screens of some features or the advanced features, such as MAC filter or static route. Basic is selected by default and you cannot see the advanced screens or features. If you want to view and configure all screens including the advanced ones, select Advanced and click Apply. Figure 125 Maintenance > Config Mode > General 

General Configuration Mode ● Basic ○ Advanced Apply Reset

The following table describes the labels in the screen. Table 97 Maintenance > Config Mode > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
Configuration Mode
Basic	Select Basic mode to enable or disable features and to monitor the status of your device.
Advanced	Select Advanced mode to set advanced settings.
Apply	Click on this to set the mode.
Reset	Click on this to reset your selection to the default (Advanced).

The following table includes the screens that you can view and configure only when you select Advanced. Table 98 Advanced Configuration Options

CATEGORY	LINK	TAB
Network	Wireless LAN	MAC Filter
		Advanced
		QoS
	WAN	Advanced
	LAN	IP Alias
		Advanced
	DHCP Server	Advanced
	NAT	Advanced
Security	Firewall	Services
	Content Filter	Schedule
Management	Static Route	IP Static Route
	Bandwidth MGMT	Advanced
		Monitor
	Remote MGMT	Telnet
		FTP
		DNS
Maintenance	Logs	Log Settings

 In AP Mode many screens will not be available. See Chapter 4 on page 63 for more information.

Sys Op Mode

23.1 Overview

The Sys Op Mode (System Operation Mode) function lets you configure whether your NBG334W is a router or AP. You can choose between Router Mode and AP Mode depending on your network topology and the features you require from your device. See Section 1.1 on page 31 for more information on which mode to choose.

23.1.1 Router

A router connects your local network with another network, such as the Internet. The router has two IP addresses, the LAN IP address and the WAN IP address. Figure 126 LAN and WAN IP Addresses in Router Mode 

graph LR
    subgraph LAN
        A["Computer"] -->|LAN IP| B["Server"]
        C["Computer"] -->|LAN IP| B
    end
    subgraph WAN
        D["Internet"] -->|LAN IP| B
    end

23.1.2 AP

An AP extends one network and so has just one IP address. All Ethernet ports on the AP have the same IP address. To connect to the Internet, another device, such as a router, is required. Figure 127 IP Address in AP Mode 

graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["1 IP"]
    C["Computer"] --> B
    D["Router"] --> B
    B --> E["Internet"]

23.2 Selecting System Operation Mode

Use this screen to select how you connect to the Internet. Figure 128 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General 

General System Operation Mode Router Access Point Note: Router: In this mode, the device is supported to connect to internet via ADSL/Cable Modem. PCs in LAN ports share the same IP to ISP through WAN Port. Access Point: In this mode, all Ethernet ports are bridged together. The device allows the wireless- equipped computer can communicate with a wired network. Apply Reset

If you select Router Mode, the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 129 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: Router 

- Ports are LAN (4 Ethernet LAN ports), WLAN, WAN - LAN DHCP server is configurable - LAN IP is 192.168.1.1 - WAN IP is configurable OK

- In this mode there are both LAN and WAN ports. The LAN Ethernet and WAN Ethernet ports have different IP addresses. - The DHCP server on your device is enabled and allocates IP addresses to other devices on your local network. - The LAN IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1. - You can configure the IP address settings on your WAN port. Contact your ISP or system administrator for more information on appropriate settings. If you select Access Point the following pop-up message window appears. Figure 130 Maintenance > Sys Op Mode > General: AP 

- Ports are LAN (all 5 Ethernet ports), WLAN - LAN DHCP server is disabled & unconfigurable - LAN IP is 192.168.1.1 - WAN IP is unreachable OK

- In AP Mode all Ethernet ports have the same IP address. - All ports on the rear panel of the device are LAN ports, including the port labeled WAN. There is no WAN port. - The DHCP server on your device is disabled. In AP mode there must be a device with a DHCP server on your network such as a router or gateway which can allocate IP addresses. The IP address of the device on the local network is set to 192.168.1.1. The following table describes the labels in the General screen. Table 99 Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General

LABEL	DESCRIPTION
System Operation Mode
Router	Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. This mode offers services such as a firewall or bandwidth management.
Access Point	Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network.
Apply	Click Apply to save your settings.
Reset	Click Reset to return your settings to the default (Router)

 If you select the incorrect System Operation Mode you cannot connect to the Internet.

Language

Use this screen to change the language for the web configurator display.

24.1 Language Screen

Click the language you prefer. The web configurator language changes after a while without restarting the NBG334W. Figure 131 Language 

Language Language Selection English Français 繁體中文 Deutsch Español Italiano

Troubleshooting

This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. • Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs • NBG334W Access and Login - Internet Access - Resetting the NBG334W to Its Factory Defaults • Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting - Advanced Features

25.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs

 The NBG334W does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 7 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NBG334W. 8 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NBG334W and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 9 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG334W. 10 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.  One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.7 on page 33. 2 Check the hardware connections. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. 4 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor to the NBG334W. 5 If the problem continues, contact the vendor.

25.2 NBG334W Access and Login


I don't know the IP address of my NBG334W.

1 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. 2 If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the NBG334W by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the NBG334W (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. Set your device to Router Mode, login (see the Quick Start Guide for instructions) and go to the Device Information table in the Status screen. Your NBG334W's IP address is available in the Device Information table. - If the DHCP setting under LAN information is None, your device has a fixed IP address. - If the DHCP setting under LAN information is Client, then your device receives an IP address from a DHCP server on the network. 3 If your NBG334W is a DHCP client, you can find your IP address from the DHCP server. This information is only available from the DHCP server which allocates IP addresses on your network. Find this information directly from the DHCP server or contact your system administrator for more information. 4 Reset your NBG334W to change all settings back to their default. This means your current settings are lost. See Section 25.4 on page 225 in the Troubleshooting for information on resetting your NBG334W. 

I forgot the password.

1 The default password is 1234. 2 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 25.4 on page 225. 

I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.

1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. - The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. - If you changed the IP address (Section 7.3 on page 102), use the new IP address. - If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I don't know the IP address of my NBG334W. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix B on page 235. 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NBG334W. (If you know that there are routers between your computer and the NBG334W, skip this step.) - If there is a DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer is using a dynamic IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. - If there is no DHCP server on your network, make sure your computer's IP address is in the same subnet as the NBG334W. See Section 7.3 on page 102. 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the NBG334W with the default IP address. See Section 7.3 on page 102. 6 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.

Advanced Suggestions

- Try to access the NBG334W using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the NBG334W, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the NBG334W does not respond to HTTP. - If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a LAN/ETHERNET port.  I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the NBG334W. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default password is 1234. This field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the NBG334W. Log out of the NBG334W in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. 3 Disconnect and re-connect the power adaptor or cord to the NBG334W. 4 If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 25.4 on page 225.  I cannot Telnet to the NBG334W. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.  I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser.

25.3 Internet Access


I cannot access the Internet.

1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. 4 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 5 Go to Maintenance > Sys OP Mode > General. Check your System Operation Mode setting. - Select Router if your device routes traffic between a local network and another network such as the Internet. - Select Access Point if your device bridges traffic between clients on the same network. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 

I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the NBG334W), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.

1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1.7 on page 33. 2 Reboot the NBG334W. 3 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. 

The Internet connection is slow or intermittent.

1 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 1.7 on page 33. If the NBG334W is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. 2 Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving the NBG334W closer to the AP if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 Reboot the NBG334W. 4 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.

Advanced Suggestions

- Check the settings for bandwidth management. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider changing the allocations. - Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications.

25.4 Resetting the NBG334W to Its Factory Defaults

If you reset the NBG334W, you lose all of the changes you have made. The NBG334W reloads its default settings, and the password resets to 1234. You have to make all of your changes again.  You will lose all of your changes when you push the RESET button. To reset the NBG334W, 1 Make sure the power LED is on and not blinking. 2 Press and hold the RESET button for five to ten seconds. Release the RESET button when the power LED begins to blink. The default settings have been restored. If the NBG334W restarts automatically, wait for the NBG334W to finish restarting, and log in to the web configurator. The password is “1234”. If the NBG334W does not restart automatically, disconnect and reconnect the NBG334W's power. Then, follow the directions above again.

25.5 Wireless Router/AP Troubleshooting

 I cannot access the NBG334W or ping any computer from the WLAN (wireless AP or router). 1 Make sure the wireless LAN is enabled on the NBG334W 2 Make sure the wireless adapter on the wireless station is working properly. 3 Make sure the wireless adapter installed on your computer is IEEE 802.11 compatible and supports the same wireless standard as the NBG334W. 4 Make sure your computer (with a wireless adapter installed) is within the transmission range of the NBG334W. 5 Check that both the NBG334W and your wireless station are using the same wireless and wireless security settings. 6 Make sure traffic between the WLAN and the LAN is not blocked by the firewall on the NBG334W. 7 Make sure you allow the NBG334W to be remotely accessed through the WLAN interface. Check your remote management settings. - See the chapter on Wireless LAN in the User's Guide for more information.

25.6 Advanced Features

 I can log in, but I cannot see some of the screens or fields in the Web Configurator. You may be accessing the Web Configurator in Basic mode. Some screens and fields are available only in Advanced mode. Use the Maintenance > Config Mode screen to select Advanced mode. You may be accessing the Web Configurator in AP Mode. Some screens and fields are available only in Router Mode. Use the Maintenance > Sys OP Mode screen to select Router Mode.  I set up URL keyword blocking, but I can still access a website that should be blocked. Make sure that you select the Enable URL Keyword Blocking check box in the Content Filtering screen. Make sure that the keywords that you type are listed in the Keyword List. If a keyword that is listed in the Keyword List is not blocked when it is found in a URL, customize the keyword blocking using commands. See the Customizing Keyword Blocking URL Checking section in the Content Filter chapter.

PART VI

Appendices and Index

Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions (229) Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions (235) IP Addresses and Subnetting (241) Setting up Your Computer's IP Address (249) Wireless LANs (265) Services (277) Legal Information (281) Customer Support (285) Index (291)

Product Specifications and Wall-Mounting Instructions

The following tables summarize the NBG334W's hardware and firmware features. Table 100 Hardware Features

Dimensions (W x D x H)	162 x 115 x 33 mm
Weight	237g
Power Specification	Input: 120~240 AC, 50~60 HzOutput: 12 V AC 1 A
Ethernet ports	Auto-negotiating: 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half-duplex or full-duplex mode.Auto-crossover: Use either crossover or straight-through Ethernet cables.
4-5 Port Switch	A combination of switch and router makes your NBG334W a cost-effective and viable network solution. You can add up to four computers to the NBG334W without the cost of a hub when connecting to the Internet through the WAN port. You can add up to five computers to the NBG334W when you connect to the Internet in AP mode. Add more than four computers to your LAN by using a hub.
LEDs	PWR, LAN1-4, WAN, WLAN, WPS
Reset Button	The reset button is built into the rear panel. Use this button to restore the NBG334W to its factory default settings. Press for 1 second to restart the device. Press for 5 seconds to restore to factory default settings.
Antenna	The NBG334W is equipped with a 2dBi detachable antenna to provide clear radio transmission and reception on the wireless network.
Operation Environment	Temperature: 0°C ~ 40° CHumidity: 20% ~ 85% RH (Non-condensing)
Storage Environment	Temperature: -20°C ~ 60°C Humidity: 20% ~ 90% RH (Non-condensing)
Distance between the centers of the holes on the device's back.	125 mm
Screw size for wall-mounting	M3*10

Table 101 Firmware Features

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Default IP Address	192.168.1.1
Default Subnet Mask	255.255.255.0 (24 bits)

Table 101 Firmware Features

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Default Password	1234
DHCP Pool	192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64
Wireless Interface	Wireless LAN, Guest WLAN
Default Wireless SSID	Wireless LAN: ZyXELWireless LAN when WPS enabled: ZyXEL WPSGuest WLAN: Guest
Default Wireless IP Address	Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (192.168.1.1)Guest WLAN: 192.168.2.1
Default Wireless Subnet Mask	Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (255.255.255.0)Guest WLAN: 255.255.255.0
Default Wireless DHCP Pool Size	Wireless LAN: Same as LAN (32 from 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.64)Guest WLAN: 16 from 192.168.2.33 to 192.168.2.48
Device Management	Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the NBG334W.
Wireless Functionality	Allows IEEE 802.11b and/or IEEE 802.11g wireless clients to connect to the NBG334W wirelessly. Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network.Note: The NBG334W may be prone to RF (Radio Frequency) interference from other 2.4 GHz devices such as microwave ovens, wireless phones, Bluetooth enabled devices, and other wireless LANs.
Firmware Upgrade	Download new firmware (when available) from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator, an FTP or a TFTP tool to put it on the NBG334W.Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Configuration Backup & Restoration	Make a copy of the NBG334W's configuration and put it back on the NBG334W later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration.
Network Address Translation (NAT)	Each computer on your network must have its own unique IP address. Use NAT to convert a single public IP address to multiple private IP addresses for the computers on your network.
Firewall	You can configure firewall on the NBG334W for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, by default, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files for example.
Content Filter	The NBG334W blocks or allows access to web sites that you specify and blocks access to web sites with URLs that contain keywords that you specify. You can define time periods and days during which content filtering is enabled. You can also include or exclude particular computers on your network from content filtering.You can also subscribe to category-based content filtering that allows your NBG334W to check web sites against an external database.
Bandwidth Management	You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers.

Table 101 Firmware Features

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Time and Date	Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your NBG334W. You can also set the time manually. These dates and times are then used in logs.
Port Forwarding	If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, then use this feature to let people access it from the Internet.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)	Use this feature to have the NBG334W assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network.
Dynamic DNS Support	With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL, www.zyxel.com for example, with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.
IP Multicast	IP Multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The NBG334W supports versions 1 and 2 of IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).
IP Alias	IP Alias allows you to subdivide a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface with the NBG334W itself as the gateway for each subnet.
Logging and Tracing	Use packet tracing and logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the NBG334W to an external UNIX syslog server.
PPPoE	PPPoE mimics a dial-up over Ethernet Internet access connection.
PPTP Encapsulation	Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) enables secure transfer of data through a Virtual Private Network (VPN). The NBG334W supports one PPTP connection at a time.
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)	The NBG334W can communicate with other UPnP enabled devices in a network.

Table 102 Feature Specifications

FEATURE	SPECIFICATION
Number of Static Routes	7
Number of Port Forwarding Rules	12
Number of NAT Sessions	2048
Number of Address Mapping Rules	10
Number of Bandwidth Management Classes	3
Number of DNS Name Server Record Entries	3

The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the NBG334W. Table 103 Standards Supported

STANDARD	DESCRIPTION
RFC 867	Daytime Protocol
RFC 868	Time Protocol.
RFC 1058	RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 1112	IGMP v1
RFC 1305	Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)
RFC 1631	IP Network Address Translator (NAT)
RFC 1723	RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 2236	Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.
RFC 2516	A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
RFC 2766	Network Address Translation - Protocol
IEEE 802.11	Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
IEEE 802.11b	Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11g	Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
IEEE 802.11d	Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.11x	Port Based Network Access Control.
IEEE 802.11e QoS	IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service
Microsoft PPTP	MS PPTP (Microsoft's implementation of Point to Point Tunneling Protocol)
MBM v2	Media Bandwidth Management v2

Wall-mounting Instructions

Do the following to hang your NBG334W on a wall.  See the Figure 133 on page 233 for the size of screws to use and how far apart to place them. 1 Locate a high position on a wall that is free of obstructions. Use a sturdy wall. 2 Drill two holes for the screws. Make sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix.  Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws. 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall. Leave a small gap of about 0.5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall. 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall. They need to hold the weight of the NBG334W with the connection cables. 5 Align the holes on the back of the NBG334W with the screws on the wall. Hang the NBG334W on the screws. Figure 132 Wall-mounting Example 

Diagram of a device with screw and pin connections, showing alignment between two hardware components (no text or symbols)

The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting. All measurements are in millimeters (mm). Figure 133 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 

4.22±0.1 6.0±1.0 8.0±0.6 2.0±0.2 30.0±2.0 2.01-2.16 30.0±2.0 4.0±0.1 4.0±0.2

Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow: - Web browser pop-up windows from your device. - JavaScripts (enabled by default). - Java permissions (enabled by default).  Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary.

Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers

You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device's IP address.

Disable pop-up Blockers

1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 134 Pop-up Blocker 

Tools Mail and News Pop-up Blocker Manage Add-ons... Synchronize... Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options... Turn Off Pop-up Blocker Pop-up Blocker Settings

You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. 2 Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. Figure 135 Internet Options: Privacy 

Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone. Medium - Blocks third-party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy - Blocks third-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent - Restricts first-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Sites... Import... Advanced... Default Pop-up Blocker Prevent most pop-up windows from appearing. Block pop-ups Settings... OK Cancel Apply

3 Click Apply to save this setting.

Enable pop-up Blockers with Exceptions

Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. 2 Select Settings...to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. Figure 136 Internet Options: Privacy 

Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet zone. Medium - Blocks third-party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy - Blocks third-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without your implicit consent - Restricts first-party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Sites... Import... Advanced... Default Pop-up Blocker Prevent most pop-up windows from appearing. ✓ Block pop-ups Settings... OK Cancel Apply

3 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix "http://". For example, http://192.168.167.1. 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 137 Pop-up Blocker Settings 

Pop-up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop-ups are currently blocked. You can allow pop-ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below. Address of Web site to allow: http://192.168.1.1 Add Allowed sites: Remove Remove All Notifications and Filter Level ✓ Play a sound when a pop-up is blocked. ✓ Show Information Bar when a pop-up is blocked. Filter Level: Medium: Block most automatic pop-ups Pop-up Blocker FAQ Close

5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. 6 Click Apply to save this setting.

JavaScript

If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 138 Internet Options: Security 

Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings. Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven't placed in other zones Sites... Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone. Medium - Safe browsing and still functional - Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content - Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded - Appropriate for most Internet sites Custom Level... Default Level OK Cancel Apply

2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. Figure 139 Security Settings - Java Scripting 

Security Settings Settings: Scripting Active scripting Disable Enable Prompt Allow paste operations via script Disable Enable Prompt Scripting of Java applets Disable Enable Prompt User Authentication Reset custom settings Reset to: Medium Reset OK Cancel

Java Permissions

1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. 2 Click the Custom Level... button. 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. Figure 140 Security Settings - Java 

Security Settings Settings: Disable Enable Font download Disable Enable Prompt Microsoft VM Java permissions Custom Disable Java High safety Low safety Medium safety Reset custom settings Reset to: Medium Reset OK Cancel

JAVA (Sun)

1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for under Java (Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 141 Java (Sun) 

Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings: Use inline AutoComplete Use Passive FTP (for firewall and DSL modem compatibility) Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1.1 settings Use HTTP 1.1 Use HTTP 1.1 through proxy connections Java (Sup) Use Java 2 v1.4.1_07 for (requires restart) Microsoft VM Java console enabled (requires restart) Java logging enabled JIT compiler for virtual machine enabled (requires restart) Multimedia Always show Internet Explorer (5.0 or later) Radio toolbar Don't display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Image Resizing Restore Defaults OK Cancel Apply

IP Addresses and Subnetting

This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.

Introduction to IP Addresses

One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered.

Structure

An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. Figure 142 Network Number and Host ID 

graph TD
    A["Router"] --> B["Client 1"]
    A --> C["Client 2"]
    A --> D["Client 3"]
    A --> E["Client 4"]
    A --> F["Client 5"]
    A --> G["Client 6"]
    A --> H["Client 7"]
    A --> I["Client 8"]
    A --> J["Client 9"]
    A --> K["Client 10"]
    A --> L["Client 11"]
    A --> M["Client 12"]
    A --> N["Client 13"]
    A --> O["Client 14"]
    A --> P["Client 15"]
    A --> Q["Client 16"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style T fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style V fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Y fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style Z fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask.

Subnet Masks

A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term “subnet” is short for “sub-network”. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 104 Subnet Mask - Identifying Network Number

	1ST OCTET: (192)	2ND OCTET: (168)	3RD OCTET: (1)	4TH OCTET (2)
IP Address (Binary)	11000000	10101000	00000001	00000010
Subnet Mask (Binary)	11111111	11111111	11111111	00000000
Network Number	11000000	10101000	00000001
Host ID				00000010

By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 105 Subnet Masks

	BINARY				DECIMAL
	1ST OCTET	2ND OCTET	3RD OCTET	4TH OCTET
8-bit mask	11111111	00000000	00000000	00000000	255.0.0.0
16-bit mask	11111111	11111111	00000000	00000000	255.255.0.0
24-bit mask	11111111	11111111	11111111	00000000	255.255.255.0
29-bit mask	11111111	11111111	11111111	11111000	255.255.255.248

Network Size

The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows: Table 106 Maximum Host Numbers

SUBNET MASK		HOST ID SIZE		MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS
8 bits	255.0.0.0	24 bits	2^24 - 2	16777214
16 bits	255.255.0.0	16 bits	2^16 - 2	65534
24 bits	255.255.255.0	8 bits	2^8 - 2	254
29 bits	255.255.255.248	3 bits	2^3 - 2	6

Notation

Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 107 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation

SUBNET MASK	ALTERNATIVE NOTATION	LAST OCTET (BINARY)	LAST OCTET (DECIMAL)
255.255.255.0	/24	0000 0000	0
255.255.255.128	/25	1000 0000	128
255.255.255.192	/26	1100 0000	192
255.255.255.224	/27	1110 0000	224
255.255.255.240	/28	1111 0000	240
255.255.255.248	/29	1111 1000	248
255.255.255.252	/30	1111 1100	252

Subnetting

You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 2^8 - 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 143 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting 

graph TD
    A["Server"] --> C["Switch"]
    B["Server"] --> C["Switch"]
    C --> D["Computer"]
    C --> E["Computer"]
    C --> F["Computer"]
    C --> G["Computer"]
    D --> H["Computer"]
    E --> I["Computer"]
    F --> J["Computer"]
    G --> K["Computer"]
    style A fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style B fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style F fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style G fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style H fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style I fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style J fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style K fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    note right of A "192.168.1.0 /24"

You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25). The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B. Figure 144 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting 

graph TD
    subgraph_A["Node A"]
        A1["Computer 1"] --> A2["Computer 2"]
        A3["Computer 3"] --> A4["Computer 4"]
        A5["Computer 5"] --> A6["Computer 6"]
        A7["Computer 7"] --> A8["Computer 8"]
    end
    subgraph_B["Node B"]
        B1["Server 1"] --> B2["Server 2"]
        B3["Server 3"] --> B4["Server 4"]
    end
    A --> C["Router"]
    B --> C
    C --> D["Internet"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    note right of A "192.168.1.0 /25"
    note right of B "192.168.1.128 /25"

In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 2^7 - 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet's address itself, all ones is the subnet's broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.

Example: Four Subnets

The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits (11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 2^6 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet's broadcast address). Table 108 Subnet 1

IP/SUBNET MASK	NETWORK NUMBER	LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address (Decimal)	192.168.1.	0
IP Address (Binary)	11000000.10101000.00000001.	00000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)	11111111.11111111.11111111.	11000000
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.0	Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.63	Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62

Table 109 Subnet 2

IP/SUBNET MASK	NETWORK NUMBER	LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address	192.168.1.	64
IP Address (Binary)	11000000.10101000.00000001.	01000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)	11111111.11111111.11111111.	11000000
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.64	Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.127	Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126

Table 110 Subnet 3

IP/SUBNET MASK	NETWORK NUMBER	LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address	192.168.1.	128
IP Address (Binary)	11000000.10101000.00000001.	10000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)	11111111.11111111.11111111.	11000000
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.128	Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.191	Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190

Table 111 Subnet 4

IP/SUBNET MASK	NETWORK NUMBER	LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
IP Address	192.168.1.	192
IP Address (Binary)	11000000.10101000.00000001.	11000000
Subnet Mask (Binary)	11111111.11111111.11111111.	11000000
Subnet Address: 192.168.1.192	Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Broadcast Address: 192.168.1.255	Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254

Example: Eight Subnets

Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. Table 112 Eight Subnets

SUBNET	SUBNET ADDRESS	FIRST ADDRESS	LAST ADDRESS	BROADCAST ADDRESS
1	0	1	30	31
2	32	33	62	63
3	64	65	94	95
4	96	97	126	127
5	128	129	158	159
6	160	161	190	191
7	192	193	222	223
8	224	225	254	255

Subnet Planning

The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Table 113 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED”HOST BITS	SUBNET MASK	NO. SUBNETS	NO. HOSTS PERSUBNET
1	255.255.255.128 (/25)	2	126
2	255.255.255.192 (/26)	4	62
3	255.255.255.224 (/27)	8	30
4	255.255.255.240 (/28)	16	14
5	255.255.255.248 (/29)	32	6
6	255.255.255.252 (/30)	64	2
7	255.255.255.254 (/31)	128	1

The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. Table 114 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning

NO. “BORROWED”HOST BITS	SUBNET MASK	NO. SUBNETS	NO. HOSTS PERSUBNET
1	255.255.128.0 (/17)	2	32766
2	255.255.192.0 (/18)	4	16382
3	255.255.224.0 (/19)	8	8190
4	255.255.240.0 (/20)	16	4094
5	255.255.248.0 (/21)	32	2046
6	255.255.252.0 (/22)	64	1022
7	255.255.254.0 (/23)	128	510
8	255.255.255.0 (/24)	256	254
9	255.255.255.128 (/25)	512	126
10	255.255.255.192 (/26)	1024	62
11	255.255.255.224 (/27)	2048	30
12	255.255.255.240 (/28)	4096	14
13	255.255.255.248 (/29)	8192	6
14	255.255.255.252 (/30)	16384	2
15	255.255.255.254 (/31)	32768	1

Configuring IP Addresses

Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the NBG334W. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your NBG334W that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your NBG334W will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the NBG334W unless you are instructed to do otherwise.

Private IP Addresses

Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks: • 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255 • 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255 • 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.

Setting up Your Computer's IP Address

All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to "communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige's LAN port.

Windows 95/98/Me

Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 145 Windows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration 

Network Configuration | Identification | Access Control | The following network components are installed: LPR for TCP/IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10/100 PCI TX NIC (3C905B-TX) Dial-Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter TCP/IP -> 3Com EtherLink 10/100 PCI TX NIC (3C905B-T Add... Remove Properties Primary Network Logon: Client for Microsoft Networks File and Print Sharing... Description TCP/IP is the protocol you use to connect to the Internet and wide-area networks. OK Cancel

Installing Components

The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter: 1 In the Network window, click Add. 2 Select Adapter and then click Add. 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP: 1 In the Network window, click Add. 2 Select Protocol and then click Add. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 4 Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks: 1 Click Add. 2 Select Client and then click Add. 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.

Configuring

1 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab. \- If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. \- If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. Figure 146 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address 

TCP/IP Properties Bindings Advanced NetsBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer. If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses, ask your network administrator for an address, and then type it in the space below. Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address: IP Address: .... Subnet Mask: .... Detect connection to network media OK Cancel

3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. - If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. - If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 147 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 

TCP/IP Properties Bindings Advanced NetsBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Disable DNS Enable DNS Host Domain: DNS Server Search Order Add Remove Domain Suffix Search Order Add Remove OK Cancel

4 Click the Gateway tab. - If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove previously installed gateways. - If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. 6 Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted.

Verifying Settings

1 Click Start and then Run. 2 In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. 3 Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.

Windows 2000/NT/XP

The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 148 Windows XP: Start Menu 

user Internet Explorer Outlook Express Paint Files and Settings Transfer W... Command Prompt Acrobat Reader 4.0 Tour Windows XP Windows Movie Maker All Programs My Documents My Recent Documents My Pictures My Music My Computer Control Panel Printers and Faxes Help and Support Search Run... Log Off Turn Off Computer start untitled - Paint

2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). Figure 149 Windows XP: Control Panel 

Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back Search Folders Address Control Panel Control Panel Switch to Category View Network Connections Ad Hardware See Also Windows Update Fonts Game Controllers

3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 150 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 

Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back Search Folders Address Network Connections Network Tasks LAN or High-Speed Internet Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Disable this network device Repair this connection Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection Local Area Connection Enabled Standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties

4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. Figure 151 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 

Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using: Accton EN1207D-TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter Configure... This connection uses the following items: Client for Microsoft Networks File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks 3.63 Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Install... Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks. Show icon in notification area when connected OK Cancel

5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). - If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. - If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. - Click Advanced. Figure 152 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: .... Subnet mask: .... Default gateway: .... Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: .... Alternate DNS server: .... Advanced... OK Cancel

6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses: - In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. - In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. - Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. - Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. - In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. - Click Add. - Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. - Click OK when finished. Figure 153 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 

Advanced TCP/IP Settings IP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Add... Edit... Remove Default gateways: Gateway Metric Add... Edit... Remove ✓ Automatic metric Interface metric: OK Cancel

7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP): - Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). - If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. Figure 154 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: ... Subnet mask: ... Default gateway: ... Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: ... Alternate DNS server: ... Advanced... OK Cancel

8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. 9 Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings

1 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. 2 In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab.

Macintosh OS 8/9

1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. Figure 155 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 

File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer Apple System Profiler Calculator Chooser Control Panels Favorites Key Caps Network Browser Recent Applications Recent Documents Remote Access Status Scrapbook Sherlock 2 Speakable Items Stickies ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk ColorSync Control Strip Date & Time DialAssist Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime™ Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech Startup Disk TCP/IP Text USB Printer Sharing

2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 156 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 

TCP/IP Connect via: Ethernet Setup Configure: Using DHCP Server DHCP Client ID: IP Address: < will be supplied by server > Subnet mask: < will be supplied by server > Router address: < will be supplied by server > Name server addr: < will be supplied by server > Search domains:

3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. 4 For statically assigned settings, do the following: • From the Configure box, select Manually. - Type your IP address in the IP Address box. - Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. - Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. 5 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. 6 Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.

Macintosh OS X

1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 157 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 

Grab File Edit Captu About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software... System Preferences... Dock Location

2 Click Network in the icon bar. - Select Automatic from the Location list. - Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. - Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. Figure 158 Macintosh OS X: Network 

Network Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location:Automatic Show:Built-in Ethernet TCP/IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Configure:Using DHCP IP Address:192.168.11.12 (Provided by DHCP Server) Subnet Mask:255.255.254.0 Router:192.168.10.11 DHCP Client ID: (Optional) Ethernet Address:00:05:02:43:93:ff Domain Name Servers (Optional) 168.95.1.1 Search Domains (Optional) Example: apple.com, earthlink.net Click the lock to prevent further changes. Apply Now

4 For statically assigned settings, do the following: • From the Configure box, select Manually. - Type your IP address in the IP Address box. - Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. - Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box. 5 Click Apply Now and close the window. 6 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer (if prompted).

Verifying Settings

Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.

Linux

This section shows you how to configure your computer's TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version.  Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.

Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)

Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 159 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 

Network Configuration File Profile Help New Edit Copy Delete Activate Deactivate Devices Hardware DNS Hosts You may configure network devices associated with physical hardware here. Multiple logical devices can be associated with a single piece of hardware. Profile Status Device Nickname Way ✓ Inactive ETH0 eth0 Ethernet Edit Device...

2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 160 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General 

Ethernet Device General Route Hardware Device Nickname: eth0 ✓ Activate device when computer starts ☐ Allow all users to enable and disable the device ● Automatically obtain IP address settings with: dhcp DHCP Settings Hostname (optional): ✓ Automatically obtain DNS information from provider ○ Statically set IP addresses: Manual IP Address Settings Address: Subnet Mask: Default Gateway Address: OK Cancel

- If you have a dynamic IP address click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. - If you have a static IP address click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. 4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 161 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 

Network Configuration File Profile Help New Edit Copy Delete Devices Hardware DNS Hosts You may configure the system's hostname, domain, name servers, and search domain. Name servers are used to look up other hosts on the network. Hostname: Primary DNS: Secondary DNS: Tertiary DNS: DNS Search Path: Active Profile: Common (modified)

5 Click the Devices tab. 6 Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 162 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate 

redhat-config-network: You have made some changes in your configuration. To activate the network device eth0, the changes have to be saved. Do you want to continue?

7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen.

Using Configuration Files

Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. \- If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. Figure 163 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0

DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet 

\- If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 164 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0

DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet 

2 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 165 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf

nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2 

3 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 166 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card

[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK] 

25.6.1 Verifying Settings

Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. Figure 167 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties

[root@localhost]# ifconfig
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]# 

Wireless LANs

Wireless LAN Topologies

This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.

Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration

The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless stations (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an Ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an Ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 168 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network 

A B C

BSS

A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 169 Basic Service Set 

graph TD
    A["Desktop Computer"] -->|Ethernet| B["Server"]
    C["Desktop Computer"] -->|Ethernet| B
    D["Desktop Computer"] -->|Ethernet| B
    E["Desktop Computer"] -->|Ethernet| B
    F["Laptop A"] -->|BSS| G["Computer"]
    H["Laptop B"] -->|BSS| I["Computer"]
    style A fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style F fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style G fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style H fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style I fill:#333,stroke:#fff,color:#fff

ESS

An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless stations within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. Figure 170 Infrastructure WLAN 

graph TD
    A["Server"] --> B["Ethernet"]
    C["Printer"] --> B
    D["Computer"] --> B
    B --> E["AP 1"]
    B --> F["AP 2"]
    E --> G["BSS 1"]
    E --> H["BSS 2"]
    F --> I["BSS 2"]
    F --> J["BSS 1"]
    G --> K["Wireless Station A"]
    G --> L["Wireless Station B"]
    H --> M["Wireless Station C"]
    I --> N["Wireless Station C"]
    J --> O["Wireless Station C"]
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Channel

A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by IEEE 802.11a/b/g wireless devices. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a different channel than an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.

RTS/CTS

A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. Figure 171 RTS/CTS 

graph TD
    subgraph RTS Range
        A["Station A"] -->|RTS| AP["AP"]
        B["Station B"] -->|CTS| AP
        AP -->|Data| A
        AP -->|ACK| B
    end
    subgraph CTS Range
        AP -->|AP| B
        AP -->|AP| A
        AP -->|AP| B
    end
    A -->|Stations A and B do not hear each other. They can hear the AP.| AP
    B -->|Stations A and B do not hear each other. They can hear the AP.| AP

When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.  Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.

Fragmentation Threshold

A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.

Preamble Type

A preamble is used to synchronize the transmission timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: Long and Short. Short preamble takes less time to process and minimizes overhead, so it should be used in a good wireless network environment when all wireless stations support it. Select Long if you have a ‘noisy’ network or are unsure of what preamble mode your wireless stations support as all IEEE 802.11b compliant wireless adapters must support long preamble. However, not all wireless adapters support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode the wireless adapters support, to ensure interpretability between the AP and the wireless stations and to provide more reliable communication in ‘noisy’ networks. Select Dynamic to have the AP automatically use short preamble when all wireless stations support it, otherwise the AP uses long preamble.  The AP and the wireless stations MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.

IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows: Table 115 IEEE 802.11g

DATA RATE (MBPS)	MODULATION
1	DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
2	DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
5.5 / 11	CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54	OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)

IEEE 802.1x

In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are: - User based identification that allows for roaming. - Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. - Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless stations.

RADIUS

RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks: - Authentication Determines the identity of the users. - Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. - Accounting Keeps track of the client's network activity. RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless station and the network RADIUS server.

Types of RADIUS Messages

The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication: - Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. - Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. - Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. - Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting: - Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. \- Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.

Types of Authentication

This appendix discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server or the AP. Consult your network administrator for more information.

EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)

MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless station. The wireless station ‘proves’ that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.

EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)

With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless stations for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender's identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead.

EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)

EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.

PEAP (Protected EAP)

Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco.

LEAP

LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x.

Dynamic WEP Key Exchange

The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the Wireless screen. You may still configure and store keys here, but they will not be used while Dynamic WEP is enabled. 

EAP-MD5 cannot be used with dynamic WEP key exchange

For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 116 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types

	EAP-MD5	EAP-TLS	EAP-TTLS	PEAP	LEAP
Mutual Authentication	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Certificate – Client	No	Yes	Optional	Optional	No
Certificate – Server	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	No
Dynamic Key Exchange	No	Yes	Yes	Yes	Yes
Credential Integrity	None	Strong	Strong	Strong	Moderate
Deployment Difficulty	Easy	Hard	Moderate	Moderate	Moderate
Client Identity Protection	No	No	Yes	Yes	No

WPA(2)

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA(2) and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication.

Encryption

Both WPA and WPA2 improve data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. In addition to TKIP, WPA2 also uses Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP) to offer stronger encryption. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. It includes a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. TKIP regularly changes and rotates the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. WPA2 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), TKIP makes it much more difficult to decode data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP, making it difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA and WPA-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it's still an improvement over WEP as it employs an easier-to-use, consistent, single, alphanumeric password.

User Authentication

WPA or WPA2 applies IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2 -PSK (WPA2 -Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.

25.6.2 WPA(2)-PSK Application Example

A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). 2 The AP checks each wireless client's password and (only) allows it to join the network if the password matches. 3 The AP derives and distributes keys to the wireless clients. 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 172 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication 

graph TD
    A["Laptop"] <-->|PSK| B["Wireless Device"]
    C["Laptop"] <-->|PSK| B
    D["Laptop"] <-->|PSK| B
    E["Laptop"] <-->|PSK| B
    B --> F["Internet"]

25.6.3 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example

You need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. 2 The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. 3 The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the pair-wise key to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.

Security Parameters Summary

Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each Authentication Method/ key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 117 Wireless Security Relational Matrix

AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEYMANAGEMENT PROTOCOL	ENCRYPTION METHOD	ENTERMANUAL KEY	IEEE 802.1X
Open	None	No	Disable
			Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
Open	WEP	No	Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
		Yes	Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
		Yes	Disable
Shared	WEP	No	Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
		Yes	Enable without Dynamic WEP Key
		Yes	Disable
WPA	TKIP	No	Enable
WPA-PSK	TKIP	Yes	Enable
WPA2	AES	No	Enable
WPA2-PSK	AES	Yes	Enable

Services

The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. - Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. - Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is User-Defined, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. - Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. - If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. - If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. \- Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. Table 118 Examples of Services

NAME	PROTOCOL	PORT(S)	DESCRIPTION
AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL)	User-Defined	51	The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service.
AIM	TCP	5190	AOL's Internet Messenger service.
AUTH	TCP	113	Authentication protocol used by some servers.
BGP	TCP	179	Border Gateway Protocol.
BOOTP_CLIENT	UDP	68	DHCP Client.
BOOTP_SERVER	UDP	67	DHCP Server.
CU-SEEME	TCP/UDP TCP/UDP	7648 24032	A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software.
DNS	TCP/UDP	53	Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (e.g. www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers.
ESP (IPSEC_TUNNEL)	User-Defined	50	The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.
FINGER	TCP	79	Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
FTP	TCP TCP	20 21	File Transfer Program, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.
H.323	TCP	1720	NetMeeting uses this protocol.
HTTP	TCP	80	Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS	TCP	443	HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.
ICMP	User-Defined	1	Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes.
ICQ	UDP	4000	This is a popular Internet chat program.
IGMP (MULTICAST)	User-Defined	2	Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
IKE	UDP	500	The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.
IMAP4	TCP	143	The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail.
IMAP4S	TCP	993	This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL.
IRC	TCP/UDP	6667	This is another popular Internet chat program.
MSN Messenger	TCP	1863	Microsoft Networks' messenger service uses this protocol.
NetBIOS	TCP/UDP	137	The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN.
	TCP/UDP	138
	TCP/UDP	139
	TCP/UDP	445
NEW-ICQ	TCP	5190	An Internet chat program.
NEWS	TCP	144	A protocol for news groups.
NFS	UDP	2049	Network File System - NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.
NNTP	TCP	119	Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service.
PING	User-Defined	1	Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.
POP3	TCP	110	Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).
POP3S	TCP	995	This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL.
PPTP	TCP	1723	Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE)	User-Defined	47	PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.
RCMD	TCP	512	Remote Command Service.
REAL_AUDIO	TCP	7070	A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.
REXEC	TCP	514	Remote Execution Daemon.
RLOGIN	TCP	513	Remote Login.
ROADRUNNER	TCP/UDP	1026	This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems.
RTELNET	TCP	107	Remote Telnet.
RTSP	TCP/UDP	554	The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet.
SFTP	TCP	115	The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers.
SMTP	TCP	25	Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.
SMTPS	TCP	465	This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL.
SNMP	TCP/UDP	161	Simple Network Management Program.
SNMP-TRAPS	TCP/UDP	162	Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215).
SQL-NET	TCP	1521	Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.
SSDP	UDP	1900	The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP).
SSH	TCP/UDP	22	Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
STRM WORKS	UDP	1558	Stream Works Protocol.
SYSLOG	UDP	514	Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.
TACACS	UDP	49	Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System).
TELNET	TCP	23	Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.
TFTP	UDP	69	Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP, but uses the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol).
VDOLIVE	TCP	7000	A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application.
	UDP	user-defined

Legal Information

Copyright

Copyright © 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.

Certifications

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement

The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: - This device may not cause harmful interference. - This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: 1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement

- This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. - IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. - To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.

注意！

依據 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。 第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。 前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。 本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。

Notices

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Viewing Certifications

1 Go to http://www.zyxel.com. 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page. 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page.

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.

Registration

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.

Customer Support

Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support.

Required Information

• Product model and serial number. - Warranty Information. • Date that you received your device. - Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it. “+” is the (prefix) number you dial to make an international telephone call.

Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.com, www.europe.zyxel.com - FTP: ftp.zyxel.com, ftp.europe.zyxel.com - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Corp., 6 Innovation Road II, Science Park, Hsinchu 300, Taiwan

Costa Rica

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Web: www.zyxel.co.cr - FTP: ftp.zyxel.co.cr - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Costa Rica, Plaza Roble Escazú, Etapa El Patio, Tercer Piso, San José, Costa Rica

Czech Republic

• E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.cz \- Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Czech s.r.o., Modranská 621, 143 01 Praha 4 - Modrany, Ceská Republika

Denmark

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.dk - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Columbusvej, 2860 Soeborg, Denmark

Finland

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.fi - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Oy, Malminkaari 10, 00700 Helsinki, Finland

France

• E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.fr - Regular Mail: ZyXEL France, 1 rue des Vergers, Bat. 1 / C, 69760 Limonest, France

Germany

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.de - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH., Adenauerstr. 20/A2 D-52146, Wuerselen, Germany

Hungary

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.hu - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Hungary, 48, Zoldlomb Str., H-1025, Budapest, Hungary

India

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] to [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Web: http://www.zyxel.in - Regular Mail: India - ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd., II-Floor, F2/9 Okhla Phase -1, New Delhi 110020, India

Japan

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.co.jp - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Japan, 3F, Office T&U, 1-10-10 Higashi-Gotanda, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0022, Japan

Kazakhstan

• Support: http://zyxel.kz/support • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.kz - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Kazakhstan, 43 Dostyk Ave., Office 414, Dostyk Business Centre, 050010 Almaty, Republic of Kazakhstan

Malaysia

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Web: http://www.zyxel.com.my - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd., 1-02 & 1-03, Jalan Kenari 17F, Bandar Puchong Jaya, 47100 Puchong, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia

North America

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Support Telephone: [phone] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.com \- Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications Inc., 1130 N. Miller St., Anaheim, CA 92806-2001, U.S.A.

Norway

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.no - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Nils Hansens vei 13, 0667 Oslo, Norway

Poland

• E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.pl.zyxel.com • Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, ul. Okrzei 1A, 03-715 Warszawa, Poland

Russia

• Support: http://zyxel.ru/support • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.ru - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Russia, Ostrovityanova 37a Str., Moscow 117279, Russia

Singapore

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Web: http://www.zyxel.com.sg - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd., No. 2 International Business Park, The Strategy #03-28, Singapore 609930

Spain

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.es - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications, Arte, 21 5^a planta, 28033 Madrid, Spain

Sweden

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] - Web: www.zyxel.se - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications A/S, Sjöporten 4, 41764 Göteborg, Sweden

Thailand

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] - Fax: [phone] • Web: http://www.zyxel.co.th - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd., 1/1 Moo 2, Ratchaphruk Road, Bangrak-Noi, Muang, Nonthaburi 11000, Thailand.

Ukraine

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] • Fax: [phone] • Web: www.ua.zyxel.com • Regular Mail: ZyXEL Ukraine, 13, Pimonenko Str., Kiev 04050, Ukraine

United Kingdom

• Support E-mail: [e-mail] • Sales E-mail: [e-mail] • Telephone: [phone] (UK only) • Fax: [phone] • Web: www.zyxel.co.uk - FTP: ftp.zyxel.co.uk - Regular Mail: ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd., 11 The Courtyard, Eastern Road, Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 2XB, United Kingdom (UK)

Index

Numerics

802.11 Mode 87

A

ActiveX 150 address resolution protocol (ARP) 113 Alert 194 alternative subnet mask notation 243 any IP note 113 AP 215 AP (Access Point) 267 AP Mode 215 menu 66 overview 63 status screen 64 AP network 215 Asymmetrical routes 144 and IP alias 144 see also triangle routes 144

B

Backup configuration 209 Bandwidth management 60 application-based 159 classes and priorities 164 monitor 168 overview 159 priority 160 services 161 subnet-based 159 Bandwidth management monitor 43 Basic wireless security 51 BitTorrent 161 BSS 265

C

CA 271 Certificate Authority 271 certifications 281 notices 282 viewing 282 Channel 39, 65, 267 Interference 267 channel 73 command interface 33 Configuration 208 backup 209 reset the factory defaults 210 restore 209 contact information 285 Content Filtering Days and Times 149 Restrict Web Features 149 Cookies 150 copyright 281 CPU usage 40, 65 CTS (Clear to Send) 268 customer support 285

D

Daylight saving 191 DDNS 139 see also Dynamic DNS DHCP 43, 123 DHCP server see also Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP client information 126 DHCP client list 126 DHCP server 111, 123 DHCP table 43, 126 DHCP client information DHCP status Dimensions 229 disclaimer 281 DNS 57, 125 DNS server see also Domain name system DNS (Domain Name System) 173 DNS server 125 Domain name 49 vs host name. see also system name Domain Name System 125 duplex setting 40, 66 Dynamic DNS 139 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 123 Dynamic WEP Key Exchange 272 DynDNS Wildcard 139

E

EAP Authentication 271 e-mail 90 Encryption 273 encryption 76 and local (user) database 77 key 77 WPA compatible 77 ESS 266 ESSID 225 Extended Service Set 266 Extended wireless security 52

F

Factory LAN defaults 111 FCC interference statement 281 feature specifications 231 File Transfer Program 161 Firewall 143 Firewall overview guidelines 144 ICMP packets 146 network security Stateful inspection 143 ZyXEL device firewall 143 Firmware upload 207 file extension using HTTP firmware version 39, 65 Fragmentation Threshold 87, 268 FTP 33, 172 FTP. see also File Transfer Program 161

G

gateway 156 General wireless LAN screen 79, 118

H

Hidden Node 267 HTTP 161 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol 161

|

IANA 248 IBSS 265 IEEE 802.11g 269 IGMP 101, 112 see also Internet Group Multicast Protocol version IGMP version 101, 112 Independent Basic Service Set 265 Install UPnP 177 Windows Me 177 Windows XP 178 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA Internet connection Ethernet PPPoE. see also PPP over Ethernet PPTP WAN connection Internet connection wizard 52 Internet Group Multicast Protocol 101, 112 IP Address 114, 131 IP address 57 dynamic IP alias 114 IP packet transmission 112 Broadcast Multicast Unicast IP Pool 124

J

Java 150

L

LAN 111 IP pool setup 111 LAN overview 111 LAN Setup 101 LAN setup 111 LAN TCP/IP 111 Language 219 Link type 40, 65 local (user) database 76 and encryption 77 Local Area Network 111 Log 193

M

MAC 86, 118 MAC address 75, 101 cloning 59, 101 MAC address filter 75 MAC address filtering 86, 118 MAC filter 86, 118 managing the device good habits 33 using FTP. See FTP. using Telnet. See command interface. using the command interface. See command interface. using the web configurator. See web configurator. Media access control 86, 118 Memory usage 40, 65 Metric 157 MSN messenger 161 MSN Webcam 161 Multicast 101, 112 IGMP 101, 112

N

NAT 129, 131, 248 overview 129 port forwarding 129 see also Network Address Translation server sets 129 NAT session 136 NAT Traversal 175 Navigation Panel 40, 66 navigation panel 40, 66 NetBIOS 110, 116 see also Network Basic Input/Output System 110 Network Address Translation 129, 131 Network Basic Input/Output System 116

O

Operating Channel 39, 65 Output Power 87

P

P2P 161 peer-to-peer 161 Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 53, 103 Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 54, 106 Pool Size 124 Port forwarding 129, 131 default server 129 example 130 local server 131 port numbers services port speed 40, 66 Power Specification 229 PPPoE 53, 103 benefits 54 dial-up connection see also Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet 53 PPTP 54, 106 see also Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol 54 Preamble Mode 269 priorities 79 Private 157 product registration 283

Q

QoS 79 QoS priorities 79 Quality of Service (QoS) 88, 120

R

RADIUS 270 Shared Secret Key 271 RADIUS Message Types 270 RADIUS Messages 270 RADIUS server 76 registration product 283 related documentation 3 Remote management 169 and NAT 170 and the firewall 169 FTP 172 limitations 169 remote management session 169 system timeout 170 Reset button 37, 210 Reset the device 37 Restore configuration 209 Restrict Web Features 150 RF (Radio Frequency) 230 RoadRunner 103 Roaming 86, 119 roaming 77 requirements 78 router 215 Router Mode 215 RTS (Request To Send) 268 RTS Threshold 267, 268 RTS/CTS Threshold 87

S

safety warnings 6 Security Parameters 275 Service and port numbers 162 Service Set 80 Service Set IDentification 80, 118 Service Set IDentity. See SSID. services and port numbers 277 and protocols 277 Session Initiated Protocol 161 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 196 SIP 161 SMTP 196 SNMP 144 SSID 39, 65, 73, 80, 118 Static DHCP 124 Static Route 155 Static route and remote node overview Status 37 subnet 241 Subnet Mask 114 subnet mask 57, 242 subnetting 244 Summary 43 Bandwidth management monitor 43 DHCP table 43 Packet statistics 44 Wireless station status 45 syntax conventions 4 Sys Op Mode 215 selecting 216 System General Setup 189 System Name 189 System name 48 vs computer name System restart 210

T

TCP/IP configuration 123 Telnet 171 Temperature 229 Time setting 190 trademarks 281 Triangle routes and IP alias 144 see also asymmetrical routes 144 trigger port 134 Trigger port forwarding 134 example 134 process 134

U

Universal Plug and Play 175 Application 175 UPnP 175 Forum 176 security issues 175 URL Keyword Blocking 150 Use Authentication 273 user authentication 76 local (user) database 76 RADIUS server 76 User Name 140

V

VoIP 161 VPN 106

W

WAN IP address assignment 56 WAN advanced 109 WAN IP address 56 WAN IP address assignment 58 WAN MAC address 101 warranty 283 note 283 Web Configurator how to access 35 Overview 35 Web configurator navigating 37 web configurator 33 Web Proxy 150 WEP Encryption 82 WEP encryption 81 WEP key 81 Wi-Fi Multimedia QoS 79 Wildcard 139 Windows Networking 116 Wireless association list 45 wireless channel 225 wireless LAN 225 Wireless LAN wizard 49 Wireless network basic guidelines 73 channel 73 encryption 76 example 73 MAC address filter 75 overview 73 security 74 SSID 73 Wireless security 74 overview 75 type 75 wireless security 225 Wireless tutorial 63, 93 WPS 93 Wizard setup 47 Bandwidth management 60 complete 61 Internet connection 52 system information 48 wireless LAN 49 WLAN Interference 267 Security Parameters 275 WMM 79 WMM priorities 79 World Wide Web 161 WPA compatible 77 WPA, WPA2 272 WPS 34 WWW 90, 161

X

Xbox Live 161

Z

ZyNOS 39, 65